Physics A Level

Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

* 7 3 7 2 6 3 2 1 9 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
Paper 4 A Level Structured Questions February/March 2017
2 hours
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.
Electronic calculators may be used.

You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 23 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (NH/SW) 127076/6
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2
Data
speed of light in free space c = 3.00 × 108 m s−1
permeability of free space μ0 = 4π × 10−7 H m−1
permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10−12 F m−1

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
elementary charge e = 1.60 × 10−19 C
the Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10−34 J s
unified atomic mass unit 1 u = 1.66 × 10−27 kg
rest mass of electron me = 9.11 × 10−31 kg
rest mass of proton mp = 1.67 × 10−27 kg
molar gas constant R = 8.31 J K−1 mol−1
the Avogadro constant NA = 6.02 × 1023 mol−1
the Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10−23 J K−1
gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10−11 N m2 kg−2
acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s−2
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

3
Formulae
1
uniformly accelerated motion s = ut + 2 at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas W = p ΔV
Gm
gravitational potential φ =−
r
hydrostatic pressure p = ρgh
1 Nm 2
pressure of an ideal gas p = 〈c 〉
3 V
simple harmonic motion a = − ω 2x
velocity of particle in s.h.m. v = v0 cos ωt

v = ± ω (x 02 - x 2)
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
electric potential V =
4πε0r
capacitors in series 1/C = 1/C1 + 1/C2 + . . .
capacitors in parallel C = C1 + C2 + . . .
1
energy of charged capacitor W = 2 QV
electric current I = Anvq
resistors in series R = R1 + R2 + . . .
resistors in parallel 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 + . . .
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
alternating current/voltage x = x0 sin ω t
radioactive decay x = x0 exp(−λt )
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17 [Turn over

4
Answer all the questions in the spaces provided.
1 (a) Define gravitational potential at a point.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A rocket is launched from the surface of a planet and moves along a radial path, as shown in
Fig. 1.1.
A B rocket
R path
R
planet 4R
mass M
Fig. 1.1
The planet may be considered to be an isolated sphere of radius R with all of its mass M
concentrated at its centre. Point A is a distance R from the surface of the planet. Point B is a
distance 4R from the surface.
(i) Show that the difference in gravitational potential Δφ between points A and B is given by
the expression
3GM
Δφ =
10R
where G is the gravitational constant.
[1]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

5
(ii) The rocket motor is switched off at point A. During the journey from A to B, the rocket has
a constant mass of 4.7 × 104 kg and its kinetic energy changes from 1.70 TJ to 0.88 TJ.
For the planet, the product GM is 4.0 × 1014 N m2 kg–1. It may be assumed that resistive
forces to the motion of the rocket are negligible.
Use the expression in (b)(i) to determine the distance from A to B.
distance = .......................................................m [3]
[Total: 6]

6
2 (a) The first law of thermodynamics can be represented by the expression
ΔU = q + w.
State what is meant by the symbols in the expression.
+DU ........................................................................................................................................
+q ........................................................................................................................................
+w ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A fixed mass of an ideal gas undergoes a cycle ABCA of changes, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
6.0
pressure / 105 Pa A B
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
C
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0
volume / 10 m3
–4
Fig. 2.1
(i) During the change from A to B, the energy supplied to the gas by heating is 442 J.
Use the first law of thermodynamics to show that the internal energy of the gas increases
by 265 J.
[2]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

7
(ii) During the change from B to C, the internal energy of the gas decreases by 313 J.
By considering molecular energy, state and explain qualitatively the change, if any, in the
temperature of the gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(iii) For the change from C to A, use the data in (b)(i) and (b)(ii) to calculate the change in
internal energy.
change in internal energy = ........................................................ J [1]
(iv) The temperature of the gas at point A is 227 °C. Calculate the number of molecules in the
fixed mass of the gas.
number = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 10]

8
3 A uniform beam is clamped at one end. A metal block of mass m is fixed to the other end of the
beam causing it to bend, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
beam metal block

mass m equilibrium position
clamp x
displaced position
Fig. 3.1
The block is given a small vertical displacement and then released so that it oscillates with simple
harmonic motion.
The acceleration a of the block is given by the expression

k
a =- x
m
where k is a constant for the beam and x is the vertical displacement of the block from its
equilibrium position.
(a) Explain how it can be deduced from the expression that the block moves with simple harmonic
motion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) For the beam, k = 4.0 kg s–2. Show that the angular frequency ω of the oscillations is given by
the expression
2.0
ω= .
m
[2]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

9
(c) The initial amplitude of the oscillation of the block is 3.0 cm.
Use the expression in (b) to determine the maximum kinetic energy of the oscillations.
maximum kinetic energy = ........................................................ J [3]
(d) Over a certain interval of time, the maximum kinetic energy of the oscillations in (c) is reduced
by 50%. It may be assumed that there is negligible change in the angular frequency of the
oscillations.
Determine the amplitude of oscillation.
amplitude = .......................................................m [2]
(e) Permanent magnets are now positioned so that the metal block oscillates between the poles,
as shown in Fig. 3.2.
metal
block
beam
permanent
magnets
Fig. 3.2
The block is made to oscillate with the same initial amplitude as in (c). Use energy conservation
to explain why the energy of the oscillations decreases more rapidly than in (d).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 12]

10
4 Explain the main principles of the generation of ultrasound waves for medical use.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

11
5 (a) State three advantages of an optic fibre compared to a metal wire for the transmission of a
signal.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) An optic fibre of length 57 km is connected between a transmitter and a receiver, as shown in
Fig. 5.1.
57 km
transmitter receiver
signal power signal power P
15 × 10–3 W
noise power
optic fibre 9.0 × 10–7 W
Fig. 5.1
The attenuation per unit length of the optic fibre is 0.50 dB km–1. The transmitter provides an
input signal of power 15 × 10–3 W to the fibre. The noise power at the receiver is 9.0 × 10–7 W.
(i) Show that the signal power P entering the receiver from the optic fibre is 2.1 × 10–5 W.
[2]
(ii) A minimum signal-to-noise ratio of 24 dB is needed at the receiver in order for it to be

able to distinguish the signal from the noise.
Determine whether the receiver is able to distinguish the signal from the noise.
[3]
[Total: 8]

12
6 (a) State one similarity and one difference between the electric field lines and the gravitational
field lines around an isolated positively charged metal sphere.
similarity ....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
difference ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A positive point charge +Q is positioned at a fixed point X and an identical positive point
charge is positioned at a fixed point Y, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
X A B Y
+Q +Q
2.5 cm 2.5 cm
10.0 cm
Fig. 6.1
The charges are separated in a vacuum by a distance of 10.0 cm.
Points A and B are on the line XY. Point A is a distance of 2.5 cm from X and point B is a
distance of 2.5 cm from Y. The electric field strength at point A is 4.1 × 10–5 V m–1.
(i) Calculate charge +Q.
+Q = ........................................................C [3]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

13
(ii) On Fig. 6.2, sketch the variation of the electric field strength E with distance d from A
to B, along the line AB.
5
E / 10–5 V m–1
4
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
d / cm
–1
–2
–3
–4
–5
Fig. 6.2
[2]
(iii) A small positive charge is placed at A. The electric field causes this charge to move from
rest along the line AB.
Describe the acceleration of the charge as it moves from A to B.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]

14
7 (a) Describe, with a labelled diagram, the structure of a metal-wire strain gauge.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) In a strain gauge, the increase in resistance ΔR depends on the increase in length ΔL.
The variation of ΔR with ΔL is shown in Fig. 7.1.
8
ΔR / Ω
6
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
–5
ΔL / 10 m
Fig. 7.1
The strain gauge is connected into a circuit incorporating an ideal operational amplifier
(op-amp), as shown in Fig. 7.2.
+6.00 V
strain
+5 V
gauge
+2.00 V
–
A +
–5 V
153.0 Ω
X Y
0V
Fig. 7.2
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

15
(i) The strain gauge is initially unstrained with resistance 300.0 Ω.
Use data from Fig. 7.1 to calculate the increase in length ΔL of the strain gauge that gives
rise to a potential of +2.00 V at point A in Fig. 7.2.
ΔL = ……………………………….m [3]
(ii) The strain gauge undergoes a further increase in length beyond the value in (b)(i).
State and explain which one of the light-emitting diodes, X or Y, will be emitting light.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 10]

16
8 (a) State what is meant by a magnetic field.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A particle of charge +q and mass m is travelling in a vacuum with speed v. The particle
enters, at a right angle, a uniform magnetic field of flux density B, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
uniform magnetic field

flux density B
d
particle
charge +q
mass m
speed v
Fig. 8.1
The particle leaves the field after following a semi-circular path of diameter d.
(i) State the direction of the magnetic field.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why the speed of the particle is not affected by the magnetic field.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) Show that the diameter d of the semi-circular path is given by the expression
2mv
d= .
Bq
[2]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

17
(iv) Use the expression in (b)(iii) to show that the time TF spent in the field by the particle is
independent of its speed v.
[2]
[Total: 9]

18
9 An ideal transformer is shown in Fig. 9.1.
core
input output
secondary
primary coil
coil
1200 turns
Fig. 9.1
(a) Explain
(i) why the core is made of iron,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) why an electromotive force (e.m.f.) is not induced at the output when a constant direct
voltage is at the input.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) An alternating voltage of peak value 150 V is applied across the 1200 turns of the primary
coil. The variation with time t of the e.m.f. E induced across the secondary coil is shown in
Fig. 9.2.
60
E/V
40
20
0
0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0
t / ms
–20
–40
–60
Fig. 9.2
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

19
Use data from Fig. 9.2 to
(i) calculate the number of turns of the secondary coil,
number = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) state one time when the magnetic flux linking the secondary coil is a maximum.
time = ..................................................... ms [1]
(c) A resistor is connected between the output terminals of the secondary coil. The mean power
dissipated in the resistor is 1.2 W. It may be assumed that the varying voltage across the
resistor is equal to the varying e.m.f. E shown in Fig. 9.2.
(i) Calculate the resistance of the resistor.
resistance = ........................................ Ω [2]
(ii) On Fig. 9.3, sketch the variation with time t of the power P dissipated in the resistor for
t = 0 to t = 22.5 ms.
3.0
P/W
2.0
1.0
0
0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0
t / ms
Fig. 9.3
[3]
[Total: 11]

20
10 (a) State what is meant by a photon.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Light in a beam has a continuous spectrum that lies within the visible region. The photons of
light have energies ranging from 1.60 eV to 2.60 eV.
The beam passes through some hydrogen gas. It then passes through a diffraction grating
and an absorption spectrum is observed.
(i) All of the light absorbed by the hydrogen is re-emitted. Explain why dark lines are still
observed in the absorption spectrum.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Some of the energy levels of an electron in a hydrogen atom are illustrated in Fig. 10.1.
–0.54
–0.85
–1.51
energy / eV –3.40
–13.60
Fig. 10.1 (not to scale)
The dark lines in the absorption spectrum are the result of electron transitions between
energy levels.
On Fig. 10.1, draw arrows to show the initial electron transitions between energy levels
that could give rise to dark lines in the absorption spectrum. [2]
(iii) Calculate the shortest wavelength of the light in the beam.
wavelength = .......................................................m [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17
21
11 Use band theory to explain why, unlike a copper wire, the resistance of an intrinsic semiconductor
decreases with an increase of temperature.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[5]
[Total: 5]

22
12 (a) Define the binding energy of a nucleus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A stationary nucleus of uranium-238 (23982U) decays to form a nucleus of thorium-234 (23940Th).
An α-particle and a gamma-ray photon are emitted. The equation representing the decay is
238U 234Th + 42He + 00γ

92 90
The masses of the nuclei are given in Fig. 12.1.
nucleus mass / u
uranium-238 238. 05076
thorium-234 234.04357
helium-4 4.00260
Fig. 12.1
(i) State the relationship between the binding energies of the nuclei that is consistent with
this reaction being energetically possible.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate, for this reaction,
1. the change, in u, of the mass,
change of mass = ........................................................u [1]
2. the total energy, in J, released.
energy = ........................................................ J [2]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

23
(iii) State and explain whether the energy of the gamma-ray photon is equal to the energy
released in the reaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

24
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

* 2 3 5 8 4 9 8 2 0 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours

This document consists of 26 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
DC (NH/CGW) 143388/6
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/F/M/18

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
3 V

v = ± ω (x 02 - x 2)
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 (a) (i) State what is meant by a line of force in a gravitational field.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) By reference to the pattern of the lines of gravitational force near to the surface of the
Earth, explain why the acceleration of free fall near to the Earth’s surface is approximately
constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The Moon may be considered to be a uniform sphere that is isolated in space. It has radius
1.74 × 103 km and mass 7.35 × 1022 kg.
(i) Calculate the gravitational field strength at the Moon’s surface.
gravitational field strength = ............................................... N kg–1 [2]
(ii) A satellite is in a circular orbit about the Moon at a height of 320 km above its surface.
Calculate the time for the satellite to complete one orbit of the Moon.
time = ........................................................ s [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/F/M/18
5
2 A cylinder contains 5.12 mol of an ideal gas at pressure of 5.60 × 105 Pa and volume 3.80 × 104 cm3.
(a) Determine the temperature of the gas.
temperature = ....................................................... K [2]
(b) The average kinetic energy EK of a molecule of the gas is given by the expression
3
EK = kT
2
where k is the Boltzmann constant and T is the thermodynamic temperature.
The gas is heated at constant pressure so that its temperature rises by 125 K.
(i) Use your answer in (a) to determine the new volume of the gas.
volume = ................................................... cm3 [2]
(ii) Calculate the increase in internal energy of the gas. Explain your working.
increase in internal energy = ........................................................ J [3]

6
(c) (i) Use your answer in (b)(i) to determine the external work done during the expansion of
the gas.
work done = ........................................................ J [2]
(ii) Calculate the total thermal energy required to heat the gas in (b).
energy = ........................................................ J [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/F/M/18

7
3 (a) A mass is undergoing simple harmonic motion with amplitude x0. The maximum velocity of
the mass has magnitude v0.
On Fig. 3.1, show the variation with displacement x of the velocity v of the mass.
v0
0
−x0 0 x0
x
−v0
Fig. 3.1
[2]
(b) A straight stiff wire carries a constant current in a region of uniform magnetic flux density.
The angle θ between the direction of the current and the direction of the magnetic field is
varied. The maximum force on the wire is F0.
On Fig. 3.2, show the variation with angle θ of the force F on the wire for values of θ between
0° and 90°.
F0
0
0 90
θ /°
Fig. 3.2
[2]

8
(c) A sinusoidal supply has frequency 250 Hz and r.m.s. potential difference 2.8 V.
On the axes of Fig. 3.3, show quantitatively the variation with time t of the voltage V for one
cycle of the varying voltage.
8
V/V
6
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
t / ms
−2
−4
−6
−8
Fig. 3.3
[2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/F/M/18

9
(d) One particular fission reaction may be represented by the equation
235U + 10n 141Ba + 92Kr + 310n

92 56 36
The variation with nucleon number A of the binding energy per nucleon BE is shown in
Fig. 3.4.
BE
0
0 A
Fig. 3.4
On Fig. 3.4, mark on the line the position of
(i) the nucleus 23952U (label this point U),
(ii) the nucleus 14516Ba (label this point Ba),
(iii) the nucleus 9326Kr (label this point Kr).

[2]
[Total: 8]

10
4 (a) Explain what is meant by the natural frequency of vibration of a system.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A block of metal is fixed to one end of a vertical spring. The other end of the spring is attached
to an oscillator, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
oscillator
spring
metal
block
Fig. 4.1
The amplitude of oscillation of the oscillator is constant.
The variation of the amplitude x0 of the oscillations of the block with frequency f of the
oscillations is shown in Fig. 4.2.
x0
0
f
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/F/M/18

11
(i) Name the effect shown in Fig. 4.2.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State and explain whether the block is undergoing damped oscillations.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) State one example in which the effect shown in Fig. 4.2 is useful.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/F/M/18

13
5 (a) Explain the main principles behind the use of ultrasound to obtain diagnostic information
about internal body structures.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
(b) (i) Define specific acoustic impedance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Two media have specific acoustic impedances of Z1 and Z2.
The magnitudes of the acoustic impedances may be almost equal or very different.
State how these differences affect the intensity reflection coefficient at the boundary
between the two media.
Z1 ≈ Z2 ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Z1 » Z2 or Z1 « Z2 ..............................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]

14
6 The digital transmission of speech may be represented using the block diagram of Fig. 6.1.
ADC DAC
P
Fig. 6.1
(a) Part of the signal at point P on Fig. 6.1 is shown in Fig. 6.2.
16
signal
/ mV 14
12
10
0
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
time / ms
Fig. 6.2
The analogue-to-digital converter (ADC) samples the signal at time intervals of 0.25 ms. Each
sample is converted into a four-bit number with the smallest bit representing 1.0 mV.
Use Fig. 6.2 to determine the four-bit number produced by the ADC at time
(i) 0.25 ms,
number ...............................................................
(ii) 1.25 ms.
number ...............................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/F/M/18

15
(b) The digital number is transmitted and then converted to an analogue form by the digital-to-
analogue converter (DAC).
Use data from Fig. 6.2 to draw, on the axes of Fig. 6.3, the output level of the DAC for time
t = 0 to time t = 1.50 ms.
Assume that there is no time delay of the transmission of the signal between point P and the
output of the DAC.
16
output
level 14
/ mV
12
10
0
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
time / ms
Fig. 6.3
[4]
[Total: 6]

16
7 (a) State what is meant by electric potential at a point.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The centres of two charged metal spheres A and B are separated by a distance of 44.0 cm, as
shown in Fig. 7.1.
44.0 cm
sphere A sphere B
P
A moveable point P lies on the line joining the centres of the two spheres. Point P is a distance
x from the centre of sphere A. The variation with distance x of the electric potential V at point
P is shown in Fig. 7.2.
2.2
V / 104 V
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
0 10 20 30 40 50
x / cm
Fig. 7.2
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/F/M/18

17
(i) Use Fig. 7.2 to state and explain whether the two spheres have charges of the same, or
opposite, sign.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A positively-charged particle is at rest on the surface of sphere A.
The particle moves freely from the surface of sphere A to the surface of sphere B.
1. Describe qualitatively the variation, if any, with distance x of the speed of the particle
as it
moves from x = 12 cm to x = 25 cm ............................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
passes through x = 26 cm ..........................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
moves from x = 27 cm to x = 31 cm ............................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
reaches x = 32 cm ......................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[4]
2. The particle has charge 3.2 × 10–19 C and mass 6.6 × 10–27 kg.
Calculate the maximum speed of the particle.
speed = ................................................. m s–1 [2]
[Total: 9]

18
8 (a) Two properties of an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) are infinite bandwidth and infinite
slew rate.
Explain what is meant by
(i) infinite bandwidth,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) infinite slew rate.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) An ideal op-amp is incorporated into the circuit of Fig. 8.1.
+4 V
T 1.8 kΩ +9 V
800 Ω 1.2 kΩ –9 V VOUT
Fig. 8.1
(i) Determine the resistance RT of the thermistor T at which the output potential difference
VOUT is zero.
RT = ....................................................... Ω [1]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/F/M/18

19
(ii) The temperature of the thermistor is gradually increased so that its resistance decreases
from 1.5RT to 0.5RT.
On Fig. 8.2, draw a line to show the variation of the output potential difference VOUT with
the thermistor resistance.
12
VOUT / V 9
0
0.5RT RT 1.5RT
−3 thermistor resistance
−6
−9
−12
Fig. 8.2
[2]
(iii) On Fig. 8.1, draw the symbol for a light-emitting diode (LED), connected at the output of
the circuit, such that it emits light when the resistance of the thermistor is less than RT.
[2]
[Total: 7]

20
9 A thin slice of conducting material has its faces PQRS and VWXY normal to a uniform magnetic
field of flux density B, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
magnetic field
flux density B
Q R
W X
direction of
motion of electrons
P S
V Y
Fig. 9.1
Electrons enter the slice at right-angles to face SRXY.
A potential difference, the Hall voltage VH, is developed between two faces of the slice.
(a) (i) Use letters from Fig. 9.1 to name the two faces between which the Hall voltage is
developed.
............................................................... and ............................................................... [1]
(ii) State and explain which of the two faces named in (a)(i) is the more positive.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/F/M/18

21
(b) The Hall voltage VH is given by the expression

BI
VH = .
ntq
(i) Use the letters in Fig. 9.1 to identify the distance t.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the meaning of the symbol n.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) State and explain the effect, if any, on the polarity of the Hall voltage when negative
charge carriers (electrons) are replaced with positive charge carriers, moving in the
same direction towards the slice.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]

22
10 (a) (i) Define magnetic flux.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A solenoid has a coil C of wire wound tightly about its centre, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
coil C
solenoid
+ –
d.c. supply
Fig. 10.1
The coil C has 96 turns.
The uniform magnetic flux Φ (in weber) in the solenoid is given by the expression
Φ = 6.8 × 10–6 × I
where I is the current (in amperes) in the solenoid.
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/F/M/18

23
Calculate the average electromotive force (e.m.f.) induced in coil C when a current of 3.5 A is
reversed in the solenoid in a time of 2.4 ms.
e.m.f. = ....................................................... V [2]
(c) The d.c. supply in Fig. 10.1 is now replaced with a sinusoidal alternating supply.
Describe qualitatively the e.m.f. that is now induced in coil C.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

24
11 Some electron energy bands in a solid are shown in Fig. 11.1.
conduction band
gap between conduction band

and valence band (forbidden band)
valence band
Fig. 11.1
The width of the forbidden band and the number density of charge carriers occupying each band
depends on the nature of the solid.
Use band theory to explain why
(a) the resistance of a metal at room temperature increases gradually with temperature,
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) the resistance, at constant temperature, of a light-dependent resistor (LDR) decreases with
increasing light intensity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/F/M/18

25
12 (a) Suggest two causes of lack of sharpness of an X-ray image.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The thickness of a sheet of metal is examined using a parallel X-ray beam, as illustrated in
Fig. 12.1.
3.2 mm
parallel
X-ray beam
metal
x sheet
Part of the beam passes normally through the metal of thickness 3.2 mm. Another part of the
beam passes normally through the metal of thickness x mm.
The linear attenuation (absorption) coefficient for the X-ray beam in the metal is 1.5 cm–1.
The ratio
intensity of X-ray beam transmitted through 3.2 mm of metal
intensity of X-ray beam transmitted through x mm of metal
is found to be 0.81.
(i) Calculate the thickness x.
x = ................................................... mm [2]

26
(ii) The ratio of the intensities is also the ratio of the powers of the X-ray beams.
Calculate this ratio in decibels.
ratio = ..................................................... dB [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/F/M/18

27
13 (a) (i) Define radioactive decay constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Show that the decay constant λ is related to the half-life t of a radioactive isotope by the
1
2
expression
λ t = ln2
1
2
[2]
(b) A small volume of solution containing the radioactive isotope sodium-24 (2141Na) has an initial
activity of 3.8 × 104 Bq. Sodium-24, of half-life 15 hours, decays to form a stable daughter
isotope.
All of the solution is poured into a container of water. After 36 hours, a sample of water of
volume 5.0 cm3, taken from the container, is found to have an activity of 1.2 Bq.
Assuming that the solution of the radioactive isotope is distributed uniformly throughout the
container of water, calculate the volume of water in the container.
volume = ................................................... cm3 [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/F/M/18

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/F/M/18

Cambridge Assessment International Education
* 4 6 5 1 2 0 6 2 3 5 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.

DC (NF/SW) 162370/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/F/M/19

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
3 V

v = ± ω (x 02 - x 2)
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 (a) (i) Define gravitational potential at a point.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to explain why the gravitational potential near an isolated mass is
always negative.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A spherical planet has mass 6.00 × 1024 kg and radius 6.40 × 106 m.
The planet may be assumed to be isolated in space with its mass concentrated at its centre.
A satellite of mass 340 kg is in a circular orbit about the planet at a height 9.00 × 105 m above
its surface.
For the satellite:
(i) show that its orbital speed is 7.4 × 103 m s–1
[2]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/F/M/19

5
(ii) calculate its gravitational potential energy.
energy = ........................................................ J [3]
(c) Rockets on the satellite are fired for a short time. The satellite’s orbit is now closer to the
surface of the planet.
State and explain the change, if any, in the kinetic energy of the satellite.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 12]

6
2 The pressure p of an ideal gas having density ρ is given by the expression

1
p= 3 ρ 〈c 2〉.
(a) State what is meant by:
(i) an ideal gas
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) the symbol 〈c 2〉.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A cylinder contains a fixed mass of a gas at a temperature of 120 °C. The gas has a volume of
6.8 × 10–3 m3 at a pressure 2.4 × 105 Pa.
(i) Assuming the gas acts like an ideal gas, show that the number of atoms of gas in the
cylinder is 3.0 × 1023.
[3]
(ii) Each atom of the gas, assumed to be a sphere, has a radius of 3.2 × 10–11 m.
Use the answer in (i) to estimate the actual volume occupied by the gas atoms.
volume = ...................................................... m3 [2]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/F/M/19

7
(iii) One of the assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases is related to the volume of the
atoms.
State this assumption. Explain whether your answer in (ii) is consistent with this
assumption.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]

8
3 A cylindrical tube, sealed at one end, has cross-sectional area A and contains some sand.
The total mass of the tube and the sand is M.
The tube floats upright in a liquid of density ρ, as illustrated in Fig. 3.1.
tube
cross-sectional
area A
sand
liquid
density ρ
equilibrium position x
of base of tube
Fig. 3.1
The tube is pushed a short distance into the liquid and then released.
(a) (i) State the two forces that act on the tube immediately after its release.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State and explain the direction of the resultant force acting on the tube immediately after
its release.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The acceleration a of the tube is given by the expression
Aρg
a=–  M x
where x is the vertical displacement of the tube from its equilibrium position.
Use the expression to explain why the tube undergoes simple harmonic oscillations in the
liquid.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/F/M/19

9
(c) For a tube having cross-sectional area A of 4.5 cm2 and a total mass M of 0.17 kg, the period
of oscillation of the tube is 1.3 s.
(i) Determine the angular frequency ω of the oscillations.
ω = ................................................ rad s–1 [2]
(ii) Use your answer in (i) and the expression in (b) to determine the density ρ of the liquid in
which the tube is floating.
ρ = ................................................ kg m–3 [3]
[Total: 10]

10
4 (a) State three features of the orbit of a geostationary satellite.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A signal is transmitted from Earth to a geostationary satellite. Initially, the signal has power
3.2 kW. The signal is attenuated by 194 dB.
Calculate the signal power received by the satellite.
power = ....................................................... W [2]
(c) Suggest one advantage and one disadvantage of the use of geostationary satellites compared
with polar-orbiting satellites for communication between points on the Earth’s surface.
advantage: ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage: ...........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/F/M/19

11
5 (a) State what is meant by an electric field.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) An isolated solid metal sphere has radius R. The charge on the sphere is +Q and the electric
field strength at its surface is E.
On Fig. 5.1, draw a line to show the variation of the electric field strength with distance x from
the centre of the solid sphere for values of x from x = 0 to x = 3R.
1.00E
0.75E
electric
field
strength
0.50E
0.25E
0
0 R 2R 3R
distance x
Fig. 5.1
[4]
(c) The sphere in (b) has radius R = 0.26 m.
Electrical breakdown (a spark) occurs when the electric field strength at the surface of the
sphere exceeds 2.0 × 106 V m–1.
Determine the maximum charge that can be stored on the sphere before electrical breakdown
occurs.
charge = ........................................................ C [3]
[Total: 8]
12
6 (a) Define the capacitance of a parallel-plate capacitor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A student has three capacitors. Two of the capacitors have a capacitance of 4.0 μF and one
has a capacitance of 8.0 μF.
Draw labelled circuit diagrams, one in each case, to show how the three capacitors may be
connected to give a total capacitance of:
(i) 1.6 μF
[1]
(ii) 10 μF.
[1]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/F/M/19

13
(c) A capacitor C of capacitance 47 μF is connected across the output terminals of a bridge

rectifier, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
bridge C
R
rectifier 47 μF
Fig. 6.1
The variation with time t of the potential difference V across the resistor R is shown in Fig. 6.2.
10
8
V/V
6
0
0 t1 t2 time t
Fig. 6.2
Use data from Fig. 6.2 to determine the energy transfer from the capacitor C to the resistor R
between time t1 and time t2.
energy = ......................................................... J [3]
[Total: 7]

14
7 (a) Two properties that an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) would have are constant voltage
gain and infinite slew rate.
State what is meant by:
(i) gain of an amplifier
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The partially completed circuit of a non-inverting amplifier, incorporating an ideal op-amp, is
shown in Fig. 7.1.
R1
+9 V
VIN R2 –9 V VOUT
Fig. 7.1
(i) On Fig. 7.1, complete the circuit for the non-inverting amplifier. [2]
(ii) For the completed circuit of Fig. 7.1, the gain of the amplifier is 25. The resistance of
resistor R1 is 12 kΩ.
Calculate the resistance of resistor R2.
resistance = ....................................................... Ω [2]

© UCLES 2019 9702/42/F/M/19
15
(iii) Calculate, for the amplifier gain of 25, the range of values of VIN for which the amplifier
does not saturate.
range from ....................... V to ........................ V [2]
[Total: 9]

16
8 A horseshoe magnet is placed on a top pan balance. A rigid copper wire is fixed between the
poles of the magnet, as illustrated in Fig. 8.1.
A
rigid copper
wire
balance
pan
horseshoe
magnet
B
Fig. 8.1
The wire is clamped at ends A and B.
(a) When a direct current is switched on in the wire, the reading on the balance is seen to
decrease.
State and explain the direction of:
(i) the force acting on the wire
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) the current in the wire.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/F/M/19

17
(b) A direct current of 4.6 A in the wire causes the reading on the balance to change by
4.5 × 10–3 N.
The direct current is now replaced by an alternating current of frequency 40 Hz and

root-mean-square (r.m.s.) value 4.6 A.
On the axes of Fig. 8.2, sketch a graph to show the change in balance reading over a time of
50 ms.
change in
2
balance
reading
/ 10–3 N 0
0 10 20 30 40 50
time / ms
–2
–4
–6
–8
Fig. 8.2
[3]
[Total: 8]

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/F/M/19

19
9 Outline the principles of computed tomography (CT) scanning.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [5]
[Total: 5]

20
10 (a) A cross-section through a current-carrying solenoid is shown in Fig. 10.1.
current
into page
current out
of page
Fig. 10.1
On Fig. 10.1, draw field lines to represent the magnetic field inside the solenoid. [3]
(b) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A coil of insulated wire is wound on to a soft-iron core.
The coil is connected in series with a battery, a switch and an ammeter, as shown in Fig. 10.2.
coil of soft-iron
wire core
Fig. 10.2
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/F/M/19

21
Use laws of electromagnetic induction to explain why, when the switch is closed, the current
increases gradually to its maximum value.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]

22
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Calculate the energy, in eV, of a photon of light of wavelength 540 nm.
energy = ...................................................... eV [3]
(c) The outermost electron energy bands of a semiconductor material are illustrated in Fig. 11.1.
conduction band
forbidden band
valence band
Fig. 11.1
The width of the forbidden band is 1.1 eV.
Explain why, when photons of light, each of energy 2.1 eV, are incident on the semiconductor
material, its resistance decreases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/F/M/19

23
12 The incomplete nuclear equation for one possible reaction that takes place in the core of a nuclear
reactor is
235U + 1n 139La + 95 Mo + 2 10n + ..................

92 0 57 42
(a) (i) State the name given to this type of nuclear reaction.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the nuclear equation. [2]
(b) The mass defect for the reaction is 0.223 u.
(i) Calculate the energy, in J, equivalent to 0.223 u.
energy = ........................................................ J [2]
(ii) Suggest two forms of the energy released in this reaction.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/F/M/19

24
BLANK PAGE
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/F/M/19

Cambridge International AS & A Level
* 8 9 8 3 4 5 8 3 4 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 28 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (ST/CT) 180485/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/F/M/20

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
pressure of an ideal gas p = 3 〈c 〉
V

v = ± ω (x 02 - x 2)
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) TESS is a satellite of mass 360 kg in a circular orbit about the Earth as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Earth satellite TESS
radius of orbit
radius of Earth
6.4 × 106 m
The radius of the Earth is 6.4 × 106 m and the mass of the Earth, considered to be a point
mass at its centre, is 6.0 × 1024 kg.
(i) It takes TESS 13.7 days to orbit the Earth.
Show that the radius of orbit of TESS is 2.4 × 108 m.
[3]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/F/M/20

5
(ii) Calculate the change in gravitational potential energy between TESS in orbit and TESS
on a launch pad on the surface of the Earth.
change in gravitational potential energy = ...................................................... J [3]
(iii) Use the information in (b)(i) to calculate the ratio:

gravitational field strength on surface of Earth
.
gravitational field strength at location of TESS in orbit
ratio = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]

6
2 A large container of volume 85 m3 is filled with 110 kg of an ideal gas. The pressure of the gas is
1.0 × 105 Pa at temperature T.
The mass of 1.0 mol of the gas is 32 g.
(a) Show that the temperature T of the gas is approximately 300 K.
[3]
(b) The temperature of the gas is increased to 350 K at constant volume. The specific heat
capacity of the gas for this change is 0.66 J kg−1 K−1.
Calculate the energy supplied to the gas by heating.
energy = ...................................................... J [2]
(c) Explain how movement of the gas molecules causes pressure in the container.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/F/M/20

7
(d) The temperature of a gas depends on the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of its molecules.
Calculate the ratio:

r.m.s. speed of gas molecules at 350 K
.
r.m.s. speed of gas molecules at 300 K
ratio = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]

8
3 (a) A body undergoes simple harmonic motion.
The variation with displacement x of its velocity v is shown in Fig. 3.1.
0.4
v / m s–1
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
– 0.06 – 0.04 – 0.02 0 0.02 0.04 0.06
– 0.1 x/m
– 0.2
– 0.3
– 0.4
Fig. 3.1
(i) State the amplitude xo of the oscillations.
xo = ..................................................... m [1]
(ii) Calculate the period T of the oscillations.
T = ...................................................... s [3]
(iii) On Fig. 3.1, label with a P a point where the body has maximum potential energy. [1]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/F/M/20

9
(b) A bar magnet is suspended from the free end of a spring, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
spring
magnet
coil
Fig. 3.2
One pole of the magnet is situated in a coil of wire. The coil is connected in series with a
switch and a resistor. The switch is open.
The magnet is displaced vertically and then released. The magnet oscillates with simple
harmonic motion.
(i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The switch is now closed. Explain why the oscillations of the magnet are damped.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]

10
4 (a) (i) Explain why ultrasound used in medical diagnosis is emitted in pulses.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain the principles of the detection of ultrasound waves used in medical diagnosis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The specific acoustic impedances Z of some media are given in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
media Z / kg m−2 s−1

air 4.3 × 102
gel 1.5 × 106
soft tissue 1.6 × 106
(i) The specific acoustic impedances of two media are Z1 and Z2. The intensity reflection
coefficient α for the boundary of these two media is given by:
(Z1 – Z2)2
α= .
(Z1 + Z2)2
Calculate, to three significant figures, the fraction of the ultrasound intensity that is
reflected at a boundary between air and soft tissue.
α = ......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/F/M/20

11
(ii) Use your value in (b)(i) to explain why gel is applied to the surface of the skin during an
ultrasound scan.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

12
5 (a) State two advantages of the transmission of data in digital form, rather than analogue form.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Optic fibres are used for the transmission of data.
(i) A signal in an optic fibre is carried by an electromagnetic wave of frequency

1.36 × 1014 Hz. The speed of the wave in the fibre is 2.07 × 108 m s−1.
For this electromagnetic wave, determine the ratio:

wavelength in free space
.
wavelength in fibre
ratio = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The attenuation per unit length of the signal in the fibre is 0.40 dB km−1. The input power
is 1.5 mW and the output power is 0.060 mW.
Calculate the length of the fibre.
length = ................................................... km [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/F/M/20

13
BLANK PAGE

14
6 Two positively charged identical metal spheres A and B have their centres separated by a distance
of 24 cm, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
24 cm
sphere A sphere B
The variation with distance x from the centre of A of the electric field strength E due to the two
spheres, along the line joining their centres, is represented in Fig. 6.2.
8
E / 104 N C–1
7
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
–1 x / cm
–2
Fig. 6.2
(a) State the radius of the two spheres.
radius = ................................................... cm [1]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/F/M/20

15
(b) The charge on sphere A is 3.6 × 10−9 C. Determine the charge QB on sphere B.
Assume that spheres A and B can be treated as point charges at their centres.
Explain your working.
QB = ..................................................... C [3]
(c) (i) Sphere B is removed.
Use information from (b) to determine the electric potential on the surface of sphere A.
electric potential = ...................................................... V [2]
(ii) Calculate the capacitance of sphere A.
capacitance = ...................................................... F [2]
[Total: 8]

16
7 (a) On Fig. 7.1, sketch the temperature characteristic of a negative temperature coefficient (n.t.c.)
thermistor. Label the axes with quantity and unit.
0
0
Fig. 7.1
[2]
(b) An n.t.c. thermistor and a resistor are connected as shown in Fig. 7.2.
Fig. 7.2
The temperature of the thermistor is increased.
State and explain the change, if any, to the reading on the voltmeter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/F/M/20

17
(c) The variation with the fractional change in length Δx /x of the fractional change in resistance
ΔR /R for a strain gauge is shown in Fig. 7.3.
10
∆R/R
8
10–2
6
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
∆x/x
10–2
Fig. 7.3
The unstrained resistance of the gauge is 120 Ω. Calculate the new resistance of the gauge
when it is extended to a strain of 0.020.
resistance = ..................................................... Ω [3]
[Total: 7]

18
8 (a) Explain what is meant by a magnetic field.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The apparatus shown in Fig. 8.1 is used in an experiment to find the magnetic flux density B
between the poles of a horseshoe magnet. Assume the magnetic field is uniform between the
poles of the magnet and zero elsewhere.
45
mm
horseshoe
magnet
30
0m
m
metal rod
balance pan
Fig. 8.1
The rigid metal rod of length 300 mm is fixed in position perpendicular to the direction of the
magnetic field. The poles of the magnet are both 45 mm long. There is a current in the rod
that causes a force on the rod. The balance is used to determine the magnitude of the force.
The variation with current I of the force F on the rod is shown in Fig. 8.2.
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/F/M/20

19
10.0
8.0
F / mN
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
I/A
Fig. 8.2
Calculate the magnetic flux density B.
B = ...................................................... T [2]

20
(c) In a different experiment, electrons are accelerated through a potential difference and then
enter a region of magnetic field. The magnetic field is into the plane of the paper and is
perpendicular to the direction of travel of the electrons, as illustrated in Fig. 8.3.
region of magnetic
field into the plane of
the paper
electron beam
Fig. 8.3
(i) Explain why the electrons follow a circular path when inside the region of the magnetic
field.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State the measurements needed in order to determine the charge to mass ratio, e /me, of
an electron.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/F/M/20

21
9 (a) The output of a power supply is represented by:
V = 9.0 sin 20t
where V is the potential difference in volts and t is the time in seconds.
Determine, for the output of the supply:
(i) the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) voltage, Vr.m.s.
Vr.m.s = .......................................................V [1]
(ii) the period T.
T = ...................................................... s [2]
(b) The variations with time t of the output potential difference V from two different power supplies
are shown in Fig. 9.1 and Fig. 9.2.
Vo Vo
V V
0 0
0 t 0 t
Fig. 9.1 Fig. 9.2
The graphs are drawn to the same scale.
State and explain whether the same power would be dissipated in a 1.0 Ω resistor connected
to each power supply.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]

22
(c) (i) The power supply in (a) is connected to a transformer. The input power to the transformer
is 80 W.
The secondary coil is connected to a resistor. The r.m.s. voltage across the resistor is
120 V. The r.m.s. current in the secondary coil is 0.64 A.
Calculate the efficiency of the transformer.
efficiency = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) State one reason why the transformer is not 100% efficient.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/F/M/20

23
10 (a) By reference to the photoelectric effect, explain what is meant by work function energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) In an experiment, electromagnetic radiation of frequency f is incident on a metal surface.
The results in Fig. 10.1 show the variation with frequency f of the maximum kinetic energy
EMAX of electrons emitted from the surface.
1.4
EMAX /10–19 J
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5
14
f / 10 Hz
Fig. 10.1
(i) Determine the work function energy in J of the metal used in the experiment.
work function energy = ...................................................... J [2]

24
(ii) The work function energy in eV for some metals is given in Table 10.1.
Table 10.1
metal work function / eV

tungsten 4.49
magnesium 3.68
potassium 2.26
Determine the metal used in the experiment. Show your working.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The intensity of the electromagnetic radiation for one particular frequency in (b) is increased.
State and explain the change, if any, in:
(i) the maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electrons
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the rate of emission of photoelectrons.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/F/M/20

25
11 Electrons are accelerated through a potential difference of 100 kV. They are then incident on a
metal target, they decelerate, and X-ray photons are emitted.
(a) Calculate the maximum possible frequency of the emitted X-ray photons.
frequency = .................................................... Hz [2]
(b) Explain why an aluminium filter may be placed in the X-ray beam when producing an X-ray
image of a patient.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The linear attenuation (absorption) coefficients μ for X-rays in bone, blood and muscle are
given in Table 11.1.
Table 11.1
μ / cm−1
bone 3.0
blood 0.23
muscle 0.22
(i) A beam of these X-rays is incident on a person.
Calculate the percentage of the intensity of the X-ray beam that has been absorbed after
passing through 0.80 cm of blood.
percentage of intensity absorbed = ..................................................... % [2]

26
(ii) In an X-ray image, white regions show greater absorption of X-rays than dark regions.
State and explain the difference between the X-ray image of bone compared to that of
muscle.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/F/M/20

27
12 (a) Explain what is meant by the binding energy of a nucleus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The following nuclear reaction takes place:

235 U + 1n 144 Cs + 90 Rb + y 10 n
92 0 55 x
(i) Determine the values of x and y.
x = ...............................................................
y = ...............................................................
[1]
(ii) State the name of this type of nuclear reaction.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Compare the binding energy per nucleon of uranium-235 with the binding energy per
nucleon of caesium-144.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Yttrium-90 decays into zirconium-90, a stable isotope.
A sample initially consists of pure yttrium-90.
Calculate the time, in days, when the ratio of the number of yttrium-90 nuclei to the number of
zirconium-90 nuclei would be 2.0.
The half-life of yttrium-90 is 2.7 days.
time = ................................................ days [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/F/M/20

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/F/M/20

* 6 2 5 0 0 5 0 8 5 0 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
This document has 28 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (LK/SW) 197654/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/F/M/21

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± ω (x 02 - x 2)
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
Answer all questions in the spaces provided.
1 (a) State Newton’s law of gravitation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Planets have been observed orbiting a star in another solar system. Measurements are made
of the orbital radius r and the time period T of each of these planets.
The variation with R3 of T2 is shown in Fig. 1.1.
2.6
2.4
2.2
T2 / year2
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2
R3 / 1034 m3
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/F/M/21

5
The relationship between T and R is given by

2 3
T2 = 4π R
GM
where G is the gravitational constant and M is the mass of the star.
Determine the mass M.
M = .................................................... kg [3]
(c) A rock of mass m is also in orbit around the star in (b). The radius of the orbit is r.
(i) Explain why the gravitational potential energy of the rock is negative.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Show that the kinetic energy Ek of the rock is given by
Ek = GMm .
2r
[2]
(iii) Use the expression in (c)(ii) to derive an expression for the total energy of the rock.
[2]
[Total: 12]

6
2 A fixed mass of an ideal gas is at a temperature of 21 °C. The pressure of the gas is 2.3 × 105 Pa
and its volume is 3.5 × 10–3 m3.
(a) (i) Calculate the number N of molecules in the gas.
N = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The mass of one molecule of the gas is 40 u.
Determine the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of the gas molecules.
r.m.s. speed = ................................................ m s–1 [2]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/F/M/21

7
(b) The temperature of the gas is increased by 84 °C.
Calculate the value of the ratio
new r.m.s. speed of molecules .

original r.m.s. speed of molecules
ratio = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]

8
3 (a) Using a simple kinetic model of matter, describe the structure of a solid.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The specific latent heat of vaporisation is much greater than the specific latent heat of fusion
for the same substance.
Explain this, in terms of the spacing of molecules.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) A heater supplies energy at a constant rate to 0.045 kg of a substance. The variation with time
of the temperature of the substance is shown in Fig. 3.1. The substance is perfectly insulated
from its surroundings.
80 Q
60
temperature
/ °C 40
20
0
P
–20
–40
–60
–80
–100
–120
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
time / min
Fig. 3.1
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/F/M/21

9
(i) Determine the temperature at which the substance melts.
temperature = .................................................... °C [1]
(ii) The power of the heater is 150 W.

Use data from Fig. 3.1 to calculate, in kJ kg–1, the specific latent heat of vaporisation L of
the substance.
L = .............................................. kJ kg–1 [3]
(iii) Suggest what can be deduced from the fact that section Q on the graph is less steep
than section P.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

10
4 (a) The defining equation of simple harmonic motion is
a = – ω 2x.
State the significance of the minus (–) sign in the equation.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A trolley rests on a bench. Two identical stretched springs are attached to the trolley as shown
in Fig. 4.1. The other end of each spring is attached to a fixed support.
support support
18.0 cm
bench
trolley
spring spring
Fig. 4.1
The unstretched length of each spring is 12.0 cm. The spring constant of each spring is
8.0 N m–1. When the trolley is in equilibrium the length of each spring is 18.0 cm.
The trolley is displaced 4.8 cm to one side and then released. Assume that resistive forces on
the trolley are negligible.
(i) Show that the resultant force on the trolley at the moment of release is 0.77 N.
[2]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/F/M/21

11
(ii) The mass of the trolley is 250 g.
Calculate the maximum acceleration a of the trolley.
a = ................................................ m s–2 [1]
(iii) Use your answer in (ii) to determine the period T of the subsequent oscillation.
T = ...................................................... s [3]
(iv) The experiment is repeated with an initial displacement of the trolley of 2.4 cm.
State and explain the effect, if any, this change has on the period of the oscillation of the
trolley.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

12
5 (a) (i) State what is meant by the amplitude modulation (AM) of a radio wave.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State two advantages of AM transmissions when compared with frequency modulation
(FM) transmissions.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The variation with frequency f of the amplitude A of a transmitted radio wave after amplitude
modulation by an audio signal is shown in Fig. 5.1.
0
1490 1500 1510
f / kHz
Fig. 5.1
For this transmission, determine:
(i) the wavelength of the carrier wave
wavelength = ..................................................... m [1]
(ii) the maximum frequency of the transmitted audio signal.
frequency = .................................................. kHz [1]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/F/M/21

13
(c) Another audio signal with the same maximum frequency is transmitted using a different
carrier wave frequency. The lowest frequency of this modulated wave is equal to the highest
frequency of the modulated wave in (b).
Determine the frequency of this carrier wave.
frequency = .................................................. kHz [1]
[Total: 7]

14
6 (a) State a similarity between the gravitational field lines around a point mass and the electric
field lines around a point charge.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The variation with radius r of the electric field strength E due to an isolated charged sphere in
a vacuum is shown in Fig. 6.1.
1.3
1.2
1.1
E / 105 V m–1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
r / cm
Fig. 6.1
Use data from Fig. 6.1 to:
(i) state the radius of the sphere
radius = ................................................... cm [1]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/F/M/21

15
(ii) calculate the charge on the sphere.
charge = ..................................................... C [2]
(c) Using the formula for the electric potential due to an isolated point charge, determine the
capacitance of the sphere in (b).
capacitance = ...................................................... F [3]
[Total: 7]

16
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows the circuit diagram containing an operational amplifier (op-amp).
3.6 kΩ
+ 3.0 V
– 3.0 V
VOUT
VIN 0.72 kΩ
Fig. 7.1
(i) State the name of this type of amplifier.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Show that the gain of the amplifier is 6.0.
[1]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/F/M/21

17
(iii) At time t = 0 the input potential VIN is zero. VIN then gradually increases with time t as
shown in Fig. 7.2.
5
potential
/V 4
0
T
t
Fig. 7.2
On Fig. 7.2 sketch a line to show the variation with time t of the output potential
VOUT from time t = 0 to time t = T. [2]
(iv) State how the circuit of Fig. 7.1 may be changed so that the gain of the amplifier is
dependent on light intensity.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An op-amp is to be used to switch on a high-voltage heater.
(i) State the name of the component used as the output device of the op-amp.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete Fig. 7.3 using the device named in (i) and a diode so that the heater may be
switched on when the output of the op-amp is positive.
– connections to
high-voltage heater
Fig. 7.3
[3]
[Total: 9]
18
8 (a) Two long straight wires P and Q are parallel to each other, as shown in Fig. 8.1. There is a
current in each wire in the direction shown.
The pattern of the magnetic field lines in a plane normal to wire P due to the current in the
wire is also shown.
wire P wire Q
plane
direction of
current
magnetic field
pattern
Fig. 8.1
(i) Draw arrows on the magnetic field lines in Fig. 8.1 around wire P to show the direction of
the field. [1]
(ii) Determine the direction of the force on wire Q due to the magnetic field from wire P.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The current in wire Q is less than the current in wire P.
State and explain whether the magnitude of the force on wire P is less than, equal to, or
greater than the magnitude of the force on wire Q.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/F/M/21

19
(b) Nuclear magnetic resonance imaging (NMRI) is used to obtain diagnostic information about
internal structures in the human body.
Radio waves are produced and directed towards the body. The radio waves affect the protons
within the body.
(i) Explain why radio waves are used.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why the radio waves are applied in pulses.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

20
9 (a) Define magnetic flux linkage.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A solenoid of diameter 6.0 cm and 540 turns is placed in a uniform magnetic field as shown in
Fig. 9.1.
solenoid
540 turns
diameter
6.0 cm
magnetic field
Fig. 9.1
The variation with time t of the magnetic flux density is shown in Fig. 9.2.
250
200
flux density
/ mT 150
100
50
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
t/s
Fig. 9.2
Calculate the maximum magnitude of the induced electromotive force (e.m.f.) in the solenoid.
e.m.f. = ...................................................... V [3]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/F/M/21

21
(c) A thin copper sheet X is supported on a rigid rod so that it hangs between the poles of a
magnet as shown in Fig. 9.3.
rod
copper sheet
X
poles of magnet
Fig. 9.3
Sheet X is displaced to one side and then released so that it oscillates. A motion sensor is
used to record the displacement of X.
A second thin copper sheet Y replaces sheet X. Sheet Y has the same overall dimensions as
X but is cut into the shape shown in Fig. 9.4.
copper sheet
Y
Fig. 9.4
The motion sensor is again used to record the displacement.
The graph in Fig. 9.5 shows the variation with time t of the displacement s of each copper
sheet.
0
t
Fig. 9.5

22
(i) State the name of the phenomenon illustrated by the gradual reduction in the amplitude
of the dashed line.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Deduce which copper sheet is represented by the dashed line. Explain your answer
using the principles of electromagnetic induction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/F/M/21

23
10 The output potential difference (p.d.) of an alternating power supply is represented by
V = 320 sin(100 πt)
where V is the p.d. in volts and t is the time in seconds.
(a) Determine the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) p.d. of the power supply.
r.m.s. p.d. = ...................................................... V [1]
(b) Determine the period T of the output.
T = ...................................................... s [2]
(c) The power supply is connected to resistor R and a diode in the circuit shown in Fig. 10.1.
V R
Fig. 10.1
(i) State the name of the type of rectification produced by the diode in Fig. 10.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

24
(ii) On Fig. 10.2 sketch the variation with time t of the p.d. VR across R from time t = 0 to
time t = 40 ms.
400
300
V/V
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40
t / ms
–100
–200
–300
–400
Fig. 10.2
[3]
(iii) On Fig. 10.1, draw the symbol for a component that may be connected to produce
smoothing of VR.
[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/F/M/21

25
11 (a) Electrons are accelerated through a potential difference of 15 kV. The electrons collide with a
metal target and a spectrum of X-rays is produced.
(i) Explain why a continuous spectrum of energies of X-ray photons is produced.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Calculate the wavelength of the highest energy X-ray photon produced.
wavelength = ..................................................... m [3]

26
(b) A beam of X-rays has an initial intensity Io. The beam is directed into some body tissue. After
passing through a thickness x of tissue the intensity is I. The graph in Fig. 11.1 shows the
variation with x of ln (I/Io).
x / cm
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
0
–0.2
–0.4
–0.6
In (I/Io)
–0.8
–1.0
–1.2
–1.4
–1.6
–1.8
–2.0
–2.2
–2.4
Fig. 11.1
(i) Determine the linear attenuation (absorption) coefficient μ for this beam of X-rays in the
tissue.
μ = ................................................ cm–1 [2]
(ii) Determine the thickness of tissue that the X-ray beam must pass through so that the
intensity of the beam is reduced to 5.0% of its initial value.
thickness = ................................................... cm [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/F/M/21
27
12 (a) Radioactive decay is both spontaneous and random.
1. spontaneous decay ...........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. random decay. ...................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Strontium-90 ( 90
38 Sr) is an unstable nuclide.
The activity of a sample of 1.0 × 10–9 kg of strontium-90 is 5.2 MBq.
(i) Determine the decay constant λ of strontium-90.
λ = ................................................... s–1 [3]
(ii) The activity of the sample after a time of 1.0 half lives is found to be greater than the
expected 2.6 MBq.
Suggest a possible reason for this.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/F/M/21

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/F/M/21

* 7 1 9 9 9 3 4 2 9 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
Paper 4 A Level Structured Questions May/June 2016
2 hours

DC (NF/SG) 108406/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
pressure of an ideal gas p = 3
〈c 〉
V

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2⎯ –⎯ ⎯ x⎯ 2⎯ )
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16 [Turn over

4
1 (a) By reference to the definition of gravitational potential, explain why gravitational potential is a
negative quantity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Two stars A and B have their surfaces separated by a distance of 1.4 × 1012 m, as illustrated in
Fig. 1.1.
1.4 = 1012 m
star A star B
P
Fig. 1.1
Point P lies on the line joining the centres of the two stars. The distance x of point P from the
surface of star A may be varied.
The variation with distance x of the gravitational potential φ at point P is shown in Fig. 1.2.
x / 1012 m
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4
–2
–4
–6
–8
q/ 108 J kg–1
–10
–12
–14
–16
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

5
A rock of mass 180 kg moves along the line joining the centres of the two stars, from star A
towards star B.
(i) Use data from Fig. 1.2 to calculate the change in kinetic energy of the rock when it
moves from the point where x = 0.1 × 1012 m to the point where x = 1.2 × 1012 m.
State whether this change is an increase or a decrease.
change = ............................................................. J
..................................................................................
[3]
(ii) At a point where x = 0.1 × 1012 m, the speed of the rock is v.
Determine the minimum speed v such that the rock reaches the point where
x = 1.2 × 1012 m.
minimum speed = ............................................... m s−1 [3]
[Total: 8]

6
2 (a) An ideal gas is assumed to consist of atoms or molecules that behave as hard, identical
spheres that are in continuous motion and undergo elastic collisions.
State two further assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Helium-4 ( 42He) may be assumed to be an ideal gas.
(i) Show that the mass of one atom of helium-4 is 6.6 × 10−24 g.
[1]
(ii) The mean kinetic energy EK of an atom of an ideal gas is given by the expression
EK = 32 kT.
Calculate the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of a helium-4 atom at a temperature of

27 °C.
r.m.s. speed = ............................................... m s−1 [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

7
3 (a) State, by reference to displacement, what is meant by simple harmonic motion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A mass is undergoing oscillations in a vertical plane.
The variation with displacement x of the acceleration a of the mass is shown in Fig. 3.1.
0
0 x
Fig. 3.1
State two reasons why the motion of the mass is not simple harmonic.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

8
(c) A block of wood is floating in a liquid, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
oscillation
block of block
liquid
Fig. 3.2
The block is displaced vertically and then released.
The variation with time t of the displacement y of the block from its equilibrium position is
shown in Fig. 3.3.
2.0
y / cm
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 t/s
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
Fig. 3.3
Use data from Fig. 3.3 to determine
(i) the angular frequency ω of the oscillations,
ω = ............................................. rad s−1 [2]

© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16
9
(ii) the maximum vertical acceleration of the block.
maximum acceleration = ............................................... m s−2 [2]
(iii) The block has mass 120 g.
The oscillations of the block are damped. Calculate the loss in energy of the oscillations
of the block during the first three complete periods of its oscillations.
energy loss = ...................................................... J [3]
[Total: 11]

10
4 (a) (i) State what is meant by the specific acoustic impedance of a medium.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The intensity reflection coefficient α is given by the expression
(Z2 − Z1)2
α = .
(Z2 + Z1)2
Explain the meanings of the symbols in this expression.
α : .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Z2 and Z1: ..........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A parallel beam of ultrasound has intensity I0 as it enters a muscle.

The beam passes through a thickness of 3.4 cm of muscle before being incident on the
boundary with a bone, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
muscle bone
intensity I0 intensity IT
entering muscle entering bone
3.4 cm
Fig. 4.1
The intensity of the ultrasound beam as it passes into the bone is IT.
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

11
Some data for muscle and bone are given in Fig. 4.2.
linear absorption specific acoustic impedance

coefficient / m−1 / kg m−2 s−1
muscle 23 1.7 × 106

bone 130 6.3 × 106
Fig. 4.2
IT
Calculate the ratio .
I0
ratio = ......................................................... [5]
[Total: 9]

12
5 The variation with time t of the voltage level of part of an analogue signal is shown in Fig. 5.1.
16
14
voltage level 12
10
0
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
time t / ms
Fig. 5.1
The signal is sampled at 0.25 ms intervals. Each sample is converted into a four-bit digital number.
Fig. 5.2 lists various times t at which the voltage level is sampled.
The digital number for time t = 0 is shown.
time t / ms 0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
digital number 1011
Fig. 5.2
(a) (i) On Fig. 5.2, underline the most significant bit (MSB) for the digital number at time t = 0.
[1]
(ii) Complete Fig. 5.2 for the times shown. [2]
(b) After transmission of the digital numbers, the signal is passed through a digital-to-analogue
converter (DAC).
On Fig. 5.3, plot the transmitted analogue signal from the DAC.
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

13
16
14
voltage level 12
10
0
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
time t / ms
Fig. 5.3
[3]
(c) The transmitted signal in (b) has less detail than the original signal in Fig. 5.1.
Suggest and explain two means by which the level of detail in the transmitted signal could be
increased.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 10]

14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

15
6 A solid metal sphere of radius R is isolated in space. The sphere is positively charged so that the
electric potential at its surface is VS. The electric field strength at the surface is ES.
(a) On the axes of Fig. 6.1, show the variation of the electric potential with distance x from the
centre of the sphere for values of x from x = 0 to x = 3R.
1.0 Vs
0.8 Vs
potential
0.6 Vs
0.4 Vs
0.2 Vs
0
0 R 2R 3R
distance x
Fig. 6.1
[3]
(b) On the axes of Fig. 6.2, show the variation of the electric field strength with distance x from
the centre of the sphere for values of x from x = 0 to x = 3R.
1.0 Es
0.8 Es
field
strength 0.6 Es
0.4 Es
0.2 Es
0
0 R 2R 3R
distance x
Fig. 6.2
[3]
[Total: 6]

16
7 A student sets up the circuit shown in Fig. 7.1 to measure the charge on a capacitor C for different
values of potential difference across the capacitor.
C meter to
V
measure charge
Fig. 7.1
The variation with potential difference V of the charge Q stored on the capacitor is shown in
Fig. 7.2.
15
Q / mC
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
V/V
Fig. 7.2
(a) State and explain how Fig. 7.2 indicates that there is a systematic error in the readings of one
of the meters.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

17
(b) Use Fig. 7.2 to determine the capacitance, in μF, of capacitor C.
capacitance = .................................................... μF [3]
(c) Use your answer in (b) to determine the additional energy stored in the capacitor C when the
potential difference across it is increased from 6.0 V to 9.0 V.
energy = ...................................................... J [3]
[Total: 8]

18
8 The circuit of an inverting amplifier incorporating an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is shown
in Fig. 8.1.
R1
+V
R2
P
–
+
V IN V OUT
–V
Fig. 8.1
(a) Explain why point P is known as a virtual earth.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Derive an expression, in terms of the resistances R1 and R2, for the gain of the amplifier
circuit.
[3]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

19
(c) A relay and the output terminals of the amplifier circuit are shown in Fig. 8.2.
V OUT
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2, show how the relay may be connected to the amplifier output so that the relay
operates only when VOUT is positive. [3]
[Total: 9]

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

21
9 A thin rectangular slice of aluminium has sides of length 65 mm, 50 mm and 0.10 mm, as shown in
Fig. 9.1.
direction of
magnetic field
Z Y
0.10 mm
50 mm
X
current
3.8 A
Q R
P S
65 mm
Some of the corners of the slice are labelled.
A current I of 3.8 A is normal to face RSXY of the slice.
In aluminium, the number of free electrons per unit volume is 6.0 × 1028 m−3.
A uniform magnetic field of magnetic flux density B equal to 0.13 T is normal to face QRYZ of the
aluminium slice in the direction from Q to P.
A Hall voltage VH is developed across the slice and is given by the expression
VH = BI .
ntq
(a) Use Fig. 9.1 to state the magnitude of the distance t.
t = ................................................. mm [1]
(b) Calculate the magnitude of the Hall voltage VH.
VH = ..................................................... V [2]
[Total: 3]

22
10 (a) A coil of insulated wire is wound on a copper core, as illustrated in Fig. 10.1.
insulated copper
wire core
Fig. 10.1
An alternating current is passed through the coil.
The heating effect of the current in the coil is negligible.
Explain why the temperature of the core rises.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Two hollow tubes of equal length hang vertically as shown in Fig. 10.2.
magnet A magnet B
plastic aluminium
tube tube
Fig. 10.2
One tube is made of plastic and the other of aluminium.
Two small similar bar magnets A and B are held above the tubes and then released
simultaneously.
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

23
The magnets do not touch the sides of the tubes.

Explain why magnet B takes much longer than magnet A to fall through the tube.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 9]

24
11 The variation with time t of the sinusoidal current I in a resistor of resistance 450 Ω is shown in
Fig. 11.1.
1.0
I/A
0.5
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
t / ms
–0.5
–1.0
Fig. 11.1
Use data from Fig. 11.1 to determine, for the time t = 0 to t = 30 ms,
(a) the frequency of the current,
frequency = ................................................... Hz [2]
(b) the mean current,
mean current = ..................................................... A [1]
(c) the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) current,
r.m.s. current = ..................................................... A [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

25
(d) the energy dissipated by the resistor.
energy = ...................................................... J [2]
[Total: 7]

26
12 Some of the electron energy bands in a solid are illustrated in Fig. 12.1.
conduction band
(partially filled)
forbidden band
valence band
Fig. 12.1
(a) In isolated atoms, electron energy levels have discrete values.

Suggest why, in a solid, there are energy bands, rather than discrete energy levels.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A light-dependent resistor (LDR) consists of an intrinsic semiconductor.
Use band theory to explain the dependence on light intensity of the resistance of the LDR
when it is at constant temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

27
13 Copper-66 is a radioactive isotope.
When a nucleus of copper-66 decays, the emissions include a β− particle and a γ-ray photon.
The count rate produced from a sample of the isotope copper-66 is measured using a detector
and counter, as illustrated in Fig. 13.1.
to counter
detector
radioactive
sample
shielding
Fig. 13.1
(a) State three reasons why the activity of the sample of copper-66 is not equal to the measured
count rate.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]

28
(b) In a time of 42.0 minutes, the count rate from the sample of copper-66 is found to decrease
from 3.62 × 104 Bq to 1.21 × 102 Bq.
Calculate the half-life of copper-66.
half-life = .......................................... minutes [2]
(c) The γ-ray photons emitted from radioactive nuclei have specific energies, dependent on the
nucleus emitting the photons.
By comparison with emission line spectra, suggest what can be deduced about energy levels
in nuclei.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

* 7 6 2 2 8 7 4 4 8 6 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours

DC (NF/FD) 108407/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
pressure of an ideal gas p = 3
〈c 〉
V

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2⎯ –⎯ ⎯ x⎯ 2⎯ )
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 A binary star consists of two stars A and B that orbit one another, as illustrated in Fig. 1.1.
2.8 × 108 km
t
VWDU$ VWDU%
PDVV0$ 3 PDVV0%
t
G
Fig. 1.1
The stars are in circular orbits with the centres of both orbits at point P, a distance d from the
centre of star A.
(a) (i) Explain why the centripetal force acting on both stars has the same magnitude.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The period of the orbit of the stars about point P is 4.0 years.
Calculate the angular speed ω of the stars.
ω = ............................................. rad s−1 [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

5
(b) The separation of the centres of the stars is 2.8 × 108 km.
The mass of star A is MA. The mass of star B is MB.
M
The ratio A is 3.0.
MB
(i) Determine the distance d.
d = ................................................... km [3]
(ii) Use your answers in (a)(ii) and (b)(i) to determine the mass MB of star B.
MB = .................................................... kg [3]
[Total: 10]

6
2 (a) State what is meant by
(i) the Avogadro constant NA,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the mole.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A container has a volume of 1.8 × 104 cm3.
The ideal gas in the container has a pressure of 2.0 × 107 Pa at a temperature of 17 °C.
Show that the amount of gas in the cylinder is 150 mol.
[1]
(c) Gas molecules leak from the container in (b) at a constant rate of 1.5 × 1019 s−1.
The temperature remains at 17 °C.
In a time t, the amount of gas in the container is found to be reduced by 5.0%.
Calculate
(i) the pressure of the gas after the time t,
pressure = ................................................... Pa [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

7
(ii) the time t.
t = ....................................................... s [3]
[Total: 9]
3 (a) Explain what is meant by the statement that two bodies are in thermal equilibrium.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Suggest suitable types of thermometer, one in each case, to measure
(i) the temperature of the flame of a Bunsen burner,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the change in temperature of a small crystal when it is exposed to a pulse of ultrasound
energy.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Some water is heated so that its temperature changes from 26.5 °C to a final temperature of
38.0 °C.
State, to an appropriate number of decimal places,
(i) the change in temperature in kelvin,
change = ..................................................... K [1]
(ii) the final temperature in kelvin.
final temperature = ..................................................... K [1]
[Total: 5]

8
4 A metal block hangs vertically from one end of a spring. The other end of the spring is tied to a
thread that passes over a pulley and is attached to a vibrator, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
pulley vibrator
spring
block
Fig. 4.1
(a) The vibrator is switched off.

The metal block of mass 120 g is displaced vertically and then released. The variation with
time t of the displacement y of the block from its equilibrium position is shown in Fig. 4.2.
y / cm 2
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
–1 W /s
–2
–3
Fig. 4.2
For the vibrations of the block, calculate
(i) the angular frequency ω,
ω = ............................................. rad s−1 [2]

© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16
9
(ii) the energy of the vibrations.
energy = ...................................................... J [2]
(b) The vibrator is now switched on.
The frequency of vibration is varied from 0.7f to 1.3f where f is the frequency of vibration of
the block in (a).
For the block, complete Fig. 4.3 to show the variation with frequency of the amplitude of
vibration. Label this line A. [3]
amplitude
0
0.7I I 1.3I
frequency
Fig. 4.3
(c) Some light feathers are now attached to the block in (b) to increase air resistance.
The frequency of vibration is once again varied from 0.7f to 1.3f. The new amplitude of
vibration is measured for each frequency.
On Fig. 4.3, draw a line to show the variation with frequency of the amplitude of vibration.
Label this line B. [2]
[Total: 9]

10
5 The signal from a radio station is amplitude modulated.
(a) State what is meant by amplitude modulation (AM).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The variation with frequency of the intensity of the signal from the radio station is shown in
Fig. 5.1.
intensity
0
193 198 203
frequency / kHz
Fig. 5.1
State, for this signal,
(i) the bandwidth,
bandwidth = ................................................. kHz [1]
(ii) the maximum audio frequency that is broadcast.
maximum frequency = ................................................. kHz [1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

11
(c) A transmission line of length 45 km has an attenuation per unit length of 2.0 dB km−1.
The input power to the transmission line is 500 mW.

The minimum acceptable signal-to-noise ratio is 24 dB for background noise of 5.0 × 10−13 W.
(i) Calculate the minimum acceptable power output from the transmission line.
power = .................................................... W [2]
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to determine whether it is possible to transmit the signal along the
transmission line.
[2]
[Total: 8]

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

13
6 (a) By reference to electric field lines, explain why, for points outside an isolated spherical
conductor, the charge on the sphere may be considered to act as a point charge at its centre.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Two isolated protons are separated in a vacuum by a distance x.
(i) Calculate the ratio
electric force between the two protons

.
gravitational force between the two protons
ratio = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) By reference to your answer in (i), suggest why gravitational forces are not considered
when calculating the force between charged particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

14
7 (a) State two uses of capacitors in electrical circuits, other than for the smoothing of direct current.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The combined capacitance between terminals A and B of the arrangement shown in Fig. 7.1
is 4.0 μF.
+F
& &
A B
+F
Fig. 7.1
Two capacitors each have capacitance C and the remaining capacitors each have
capacitance 3.0 μF.
The potential difference (p.d.) between terminals A and B is 12 V.
(i) Determine the capacitance C.
C = ................................................... μF [2]
(ii) Calculate the magnitude of the total positive charge transferred to the arrangement.
charge = ................................................... μC [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

15
(iii) Use your answer in (ii) to state the magnitude of the charge on one plate of
1. a capacitor of capacitance C,
charge = ......................................................... μC
2. a capacitor of capacitance 3.0 μF.
charge = ......................................................... μC
[2]
[Total: 8]

16
8 An ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) has infinite voltage gain and infinite slew rate.
(a) State what is meant by
(i) the voltage gain,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A non-inverting amplifier circuit incorporating an ideal op-amp is shown in Fig. 8.1.
9
–
²9
9,1 N1 9287
Fig. 8.1
The supply to the op-amp is +9 V / −9 V.

The voltage gain of the amplifier circuit is 12.
Determine the resistance of resistor R.
resistance = ..................................................... Ω [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

17
(c) For the circuit of Fig. 8.1, the variation with time t of the input potential VIN to the amplifier is
shown in Fig. 8.2.
1.0
9IN / V
0.5
0
W W W
–0.5
–1.0
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.3, show the variation with time t of the output potential VOUT for time t = 0 to time
t = t2.
15
9OUT / V
10
0
W W W
–5
–10
–15
Fig. 8.3
[4]
[Total: 9]

18
9 A magnetic field of flux density B is normal to face PQRS of a slice of a conducting material, as
shown in Fig. 9.1.
magnetic field
flux density %
S
R
Z FXUUHQWI
P Q
X Y
Fig. 9.1
A current I in the slice is normal to face QRZY of the slice.
The Hall voltage VH across the slice is given by the expression
BI
VH = .
ntq
(a) (i) State what is represented by the symbol n.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The symbol t represents the length of one side of the slice. Use letters from Fig. 9.1 to
identify t.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) In general, the Hall voltage produced in a slice of a metal is very small.
For a slice of the same dimensions with the same current and magnetic flux density, the
Hall voltage produced in a semiconductor material is much larger.
Suggest and explain why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

19
(ii) In some semiconducting materials, electrons are mainly responsible for conduction.
In other semiconducting materials, holes are mainly responsible for conduction.
Suggest and explain the difference, if any, that conduction by electrons or by holes will
have on the Hall voltage.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]

20
10 Two coils P and Q are placed close to one another, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
coil P coil Q
V
power
supply
Fig. 10.1
(a) The current in coil P is constant.
An iron rod is inserted into coil P.
Explain why, during the time that the rod is moving, there is a reading on the voltmeter
connected to coil Q.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

21
(b) The current in coil P is now varied as shown in Fig. 10.2.
current
0
0 W1 W2 WLPH
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.3, show the variation with time of the reading of the voltmeter connected to coil Q
for time t = 0 to time t = t2.
voltmeter
reading
0
0 W1 W2 time
Fig. 10.3 [4]
[Total: 6]

22
11 A bridge rectifier contains four ideal diodes A, B, C and D, as shown in Fig. 11.1.
input $
9
' & / N 1
Fig. 11.1
The output of the rectifier is connected to a load L of resistance 2.4 kΩ.
(a) On Fig. 11.1, mark with the letter P the positive terminal of the load. [1]
(b) The variation with time t of the potential difference V across the input to the rectifier is shown
in Fig. 11.2.
6 LQSXW
9/V
4
0
W
–2
–4
–6
–8
Fig. 11.2
Calculate the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) current in the load L.
r.m.s. current = ..................................................... A [2]

© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16
23
(c) The potential difference across the load L is to be smoothed using a capacitor.
(i) On Fig. 11.1, draw the symbol for a capacitor, connected to produce smoothing. [1]
(ii) The minimum potential difference across the load L with the smoothing capacitor
connected is 3.0 V.
On Fig. 11.2, sketch the variation with time t of the potential difference across the load L.
[3]
[Total: 7]

24
12 High-energy electrons collide with a metal target, producing X-ray photons.
The variation with wavelength of the intensity of the X-ray beam is illustrated in Fig. 12.1.
intensity
0
wavelength
Fig. 12.1
(a) Explain why there is
(i) a continuous distribution of wavelengths,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) a sharp cut-off at short wavelength,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) a series of peaks superimposed on the continuous distribution of wavelengths.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) In the X-ray imaging of body structures, longer wavelength photons are frequently filtered out
of the X-ray beam.
(i) State how this filtering is achieved.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

25
(ii) Suggest the reason for this filtering.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

26
13 (a) Explain what is meant by gamma radiation (γ-radiation).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A source of gamma radiation is placed a fixed distance away from a detector and counter, as
illustrated in Fig. 13.1.
WRFRXQWHU
GHWHFWRU
OHDGVKHHW
[
VKLHOGLQJ VRXUFH
Fig. 13.1
A sheet of lead of thickness x is placed between the source and the detector.
The average count rate C, corrected for background, is recorded. This is repeated for different
values of x.
The variation with thickness x of ln C is shown in Fig. 13.2.
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

27
4.00
3.75
ln (& / s–1)
3.50
3.25
3.00
2.75
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
[ / mm
Fig. 13.2
The absorption of gamma radiation in lead may be represented by the equation
C = C0 e−μx
where C0 is the count rate for x = 0 and μ is the linear attenuation (absorption) coefficient.
Use Fig. 13.2 to determine the linear attenuation coefficient μ for this gamma radiation in lead.
μ = .............................................. mm−1 [4]
Question 13 continues on the next page.

28
(c) The value of μ calculated in (b) is for gamma radiation in lead.
Suggest and explain whether the value of μ for aluminium would be the same, greater or
smaller.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

* 7 2 8 0 3 2 0 9 8 8 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
2 hours

DC (LK/FD) 127087/2
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/M/J/17

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas W = pΔV
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
pressure of an ideal gas p = 〈c 〉
3 V

v = ± ω (x 02 - x 2)
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 (a) Explain how a satellite may be in a circular orbit around a planet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The Earth and the Moon may be considered to be uniform spheres that are isolated in space.
The Earth has radius R and mean density ρ. The Moon, mass m, is in a circular orbit about
the Earth with radius nR, as illustrated in Fig. 1.1.
Earth
radius R
Moon
nR
Fig. 1.1
The Moon makes one complete orbit of the Earth in time T.

Show that the mean density ρ of the Earth is given by the expression
3πn3
ρ= .
GT 2
[4]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/M/J/17

5
(c) The radius R of the Earth is 6.38 × 103 km and the distance between the centre of the Earth
and the centre of the Moon is 3.84 × 105 km.
The period T of the orbit of the Moon about the Earth is 27.3 days.
Use the expression in (b) to calculate ρ.
ρ = ............................................... kg m–3 [3]
[Total: 9]

6
2 A bar magnet of mass 180 g is suspended from the free end of a spring, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1.
spring
magnet
coil
Fig. 2.1
The magnet hangs so that one pole is near the centre of a coil of wire.
The coil is connected in series with a resistor and a switch. The switch is open.
The magnet is displaced vertically and then allowed to oscillate with one pole remaining inside the
coil. The other pole remains outside the coil.
At time t = 0, the magnet is oscillating freely as it passes through its equilibrium position. At time
t = 3.0 s, the switch in the circuit is closed.
The variation with time t of the vertical displacement y of the magnet is shown in Fig. 2.2.
2.0
1.5
y / cm
1.0
0.5
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
–0.5 t/s
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/M/J/17
7
(a) Determine, to two significant figures, the frequency of oscillation of the magnet.
frequency = .................................................... Hz [2]
(b) State whether the closing of the switch gives rise to light, heavy or critical damping.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Calculate the change in the energy ΔE of oscillation of the magnet between time t = 2.7 s and
time t = 7.5 s. Explain your working.
ΔE = ....................................................... J [6]
[Total: 9]

8
3 The digital transmission of speech may be illustrated using the block diagram of Fig. 3.1.
serial -to -
ADC X parallel Y
optic fibre converter
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State what is meant by a digital signal.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the names of the components labelled X and Y on Fig. 3.1.
X: ......................................................................................................................................
Y: ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Describe the function of the ADC.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The optic fibre has length 84 km and the attenuation per unit length in the fibre is 0.19 dB km–1.
The input power to the optic fibre is 9.7 mW. At the output from the optic fibre, the signal-to-
noise ratio is 28 dB.
Calculate
(i) in dB, the ratio
input power to optic fibre

,
noise power at output of optic fibre
ratio = .................................................... dB [2]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/M/J/17

9
(ii) the noise power at the output of the optic fibre.
noise power = ..................................................... W [3]
[Total: 10]

10
4 (a) Describe the motion of molecules in a gas, according to the kinetic theory of gases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Describe what is observed when viewing Brownian motion that provides evidence for your
answer in (a).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) At a pressure of 1.05 × 105 Pa and a temperature of 27 °C, 1.00 mol of helium gas has a
volume of 0.0240 m3.
The mass of 1.00 mol of helium gas, assumed to be an ideal gas, is 4.00 g.
(i) Calculate the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of an atom of helium gas for a temperature
of 27 °C.
r.m.s. speed = ................................................. m s–1 [3]
(ii) Using your answer in (i), calculate the r.m.s. speed of the atoms at 177 °C.
r.m.s. speed = ................................................. m s–1 [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/M/J/17

11
5 An α-particle is travelling in a vacuum towards the centre of a gold nucleus, as illustrated in

Fig. 5.1.
gold nucleus α-particle
charge 79e energy 7.7 × 10–13 J
Fig. 5.1
The gold nucleus has charge 79e.

The gold nucleus and the α-particle may be assumed to behave as point charges.
At a large distance from the gold nucleus, the α-particle has energy 7.7 × 10–13 J.
(a) The α-particle does not collide with the gold nucleus. Show that the radius of the gold nucleus
must be less than 4.7 × 10–14 m.
[3]
(b) Determine the acceleration of the α-particle for a separation of 4.7 × 10–14 m between the
centres of the gold nucleus and of the α-particle.
acceleration = ................................................. m s–2 [3]
(c) In an α-particle scattering experiment, the beam of α-particles is incident on a very thin gold
foil.
Suggest why the gold foil must be very thin.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
12
6 A comparator circuit is designed to switch on a mains lamp when the ambient light level reaches a
set value.
An incomplete diagram of the circuit is shown in Fig. 6.1.
+5 V
D
–
6V
+
RV –5 V
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) A relay is required as part of the output device. This is not shown in Fig. 6.1. Explain why
a relay is required.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) On Fig. 6.1, draw the symbol for a relay connected in the circuit as part of the output
device. [2]
(b) Describe the function of
(i) the variable resistor RV,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the diode D.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/M/J/17

13
(c) State whether the lamp will switch on as the light level increases or as it decreases. Explain
your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 9]

14
7 An electron having charge –q and mass m is accelerated from rest in a vacuum through a potential
difference V.
The electron then enters a region of uniform magnetic field of magnetic flux density B, as shown
in Fig. 7.1.
uniform magnetic
field into plane
of paper
path of
electron
Fig. 7.1
The direction of the uniform magnetic field is into the plane of the paper.
The velocity of the electron as it enters the magnetic field is normal to the magnetic field.
The radius of the circular path of the electron in the magnetic field is r.
(a) Explain why the path of the electron in the magnetic field is the arc of a circle.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Show that the magnitude p of the momentum of the electron as it enters the magnetic field is
given by
p = (2mqV ).
[2]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/M/J/17

15
(c) The potential difference V is 120 V. The radius r of the circular arc is 7.4 cm.
Determine the magnitude B of the magnetic flux density.
B = ....................................................... T [3]
(d) The potential difference V in (c) is increased. The magnetic flux density B remains unchanged.
By reference to the momentum of the electron, explain the effect of this increase on the
radius r of the path of the electron in the magnetic field.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 10]

16
8 Explain the main principles behind the use of nuclear magnetic resonance imaging (NMRI) to
obtain information about internal body structures.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[8]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/M/J/17

17
9 A simple transformer is illustrated in Fig. 9.1.
laminated
iron core
input output
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) State why the transformer has an iron core, rather than having no core.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why the core is laminated.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) By reference to the action of a transformer, explain why the input to the transformer is an
alternating voltage, rather than a constant voltage.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 6]

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/M/J/17

19
10 (a) State
(i) what is meant by the hardness of an X-ray beam,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) how the hardness of an X-ray beam from an X-ray tube is increased.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The same parallel beam of X-ray radiation is incident, separately, on samples of bone and of
muscle.
Data for the thickness x of the samples of bone and of muscle, together with the linear
attenuation (absorption) coefficients μ of the radiation in bone and in muscle, are given in Fig.
10.1.
x / cm μ / cm–1
bone 1.5 2.9
muscle 4.0 0.95
Fig. 10.1
Determine the ratio
intensity transmitted through bone

.
intensity transmitted through muscle
ratio = .......................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]

20
11 A beam of light consists of a continuous range of wavelengths from 420 nm to 740 nm.
The light passes through a cloud of cool gas, as shown in Fig. 11.1.
incident light emergent light

cool gas
wavelengths 420 nm – 740 nm
Fig. 11.1
(a) The spectrum of the light emerging from the cloud of cool gas is viewed using a diffraction
grating.
Explain why this spectrum contains a number of dark lines.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Some of the electron energy levels of the atoms in the cloud of gas are represented in
Fig. 11.2.
– 0.38 eV
– 0.54 eV
– 0.85 eV
– 1.5 eV
energy
– 3.4 eV
– 13.6 eV
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/M/J/17

21
(i) Light of wavelength 420 nm has a photon energy of 2.96 eV.

Calculate the photon energy, in eV, of light of wavelength 740 nm.
photon energy = .................................................... eV [2]
(ii) Use data from (i) and your answer in (i) to show, on Fig. 11.2, the changes in energy
levels giving rise to the dark lines in (a). [2]
[Total: 8]

22
12 One possible nuclear reaction that takes place in a nuclear reactor is given by the equation
235U + 1n 95Mo + 139La + 210n + x –10e

92 0 42 57
Data for the nuclei and particles are given in Fig. 12.1.
nucleus or particle mass / u

235U 235.123
92
95Mo 94.945
42
139La 138.955
57
1n 1.00863
0
0 5.49 × 10–4
–1e
Fig. 12.1
(a) Determine, for this nuclear reaction, the value of x.
x = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/M/J/17

23
(b) (i) Show that the energy equivalent to 1.00 u is 934 MeV.
[3]
(ii) Calculate the energy, in MeV, released in this reaction. Give your answer to three
significant figures.
energy = ................................................. MeV [3]
(c) Suggest the forms of energy into which the energy calculated in (b)(ii) is transformed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/M/J/17

24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/M/J/17

* 3 8 2 8 8 0 4 9 0 5 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours

This document consists of 24 printed pages.
DC (CW/JG) 127310/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/M/J/17

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
3 V

v = ± ω (x 02 - x 2)
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 (a) Define gravitational field strength.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The mass of a spherical comet of radius 3.6 km is approximately 1.0 × 1013 kg.
(i) Assuming that the comet has constant density, calculate the gravitational field strength
on the surface of the comet.
field strength = ............................................... N kg–1 [2]
(ii) A probe having a weight of 960 N on Earth lands on the comet.

Using your answer in (i), determine the weight of the probe on the surface of the comet.
weight = ...................................................... N [2]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/M/J/17

5
(c) A second comet has a length of approximately 4.5 km and a width of approximately 2.6 km. Its
outline is illustrated in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
Suggest one similarity and one difference between the gravitational fields at the surface of
this comet and at the surface of the comet in (b).
similarity: ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
difference: .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]

6
2 (a) The pressure p and volume V of an ideal gas are related to the density ρ of the gas by the
expression
1
p = ρ 〈c 2〉.
3
(i) State what is meant by the symbol 〈c 2〉.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Use the expression to show that the mean kinetic energy EK of a gas molecule is given
by
3
EK = kT
2
[3]
(b) (i) An ideal gas containing 1.0 mol of molecules is heated at constant volume.
Use the expression in (a)(ii) to show that the thermal energy required to raise the
3
temperature of the gas by 1.0 K has a value of R, where R is the molar gas constant.
2
[3]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/M/J/17

7
(ii) Nitrogen may be assumed to be an ideal gas. The molar mass of nitrogen gas is 28 g mol–1.
Use the answer in (b)(i) to calculate a value for the specific heat capacity, in J kg–1 K–1, at
constant volume for nitrogen.
specific heat capacity = .......................................... J kg–1 K–1 [2]
[Total: 9]

8
3 A bar magnet of mass 250 g is suspended from the free end of a spring, as illustrated in Fig. 3.1.
spring
magnet
coil
Fig. 3.1
The magnet hangs so that one pole is near the centre of a coil of wire.
The coil is connected in series with a resistor and a switch. The switch is open.
The magnet is displaced vertically and then allowed to oscillate with one pole remaining inside the
coil. The other pole remains outside the coil.
At time t = 0, the magnet is oscillating freely as it passes through its equilibrium position. At time
t = 6.0 s, the switch in the circuit is closed.
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/M/J/17

9
The variation with time t of the vertical displacement y of the magnet is shown in Fig. 3.2.
2.0
1.5
y / cm
1.0
0.5
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
t/s
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
Fig. 3.2
(a) For the oscillating magnet, use data from Fig. 3.2 to calculate, to two significant figures,
(i) the frequency f,
f = .................................................... Hz [2]
(ii) the energy of the oscillations during the time t = 0 to time t = 6.0 s.
energy = ....................................................... J [3]

10
(b) (i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Use Faraday’s law and energy conservation to explain why the amplitude of the
oscillations of the magnet reduces after time t = 6.0 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/M/J/17

11
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]

12
(b) A parallel beam of ultrasound has intensity I0 as it enters a muscle of thickness 4.6 cm, as
4.6 cm
muscle
beam of I0 IT
ultrasound
Fig. 4.1
The intensity of the beam just before it leaves the muscle is IT.
The ratio I0 / IT is found to be 2.9.
Calculate the linear attenuation (absorption) coefficient μ of the ultrasound in the layer of
muscle.
μ = ................................................. cm–1 [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/M/J/17

13
5 (a) State two advantages of the transmission of data in digital form rather than in analogue form.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) An analogue signal SI is converted into a digital signal D using an analogue-to-digital

converter (ADC). After transmission of the digital signal, it is converted back to an analogue
signal ST using a digital-to-analogue converter (DAC), as illustrated in Fig. 5.1.
analogue signal digital signal analogue signal

ADC DAC
SI D ST
Fig. 5.1
(i) Outline the process by which the ADC converts the analogue signal SI into the digital
signal D.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The ADC and the DAC operate with the same sampling rate and the same number of
bits in each digital number.
State the effect on the transmitted analogue signal ST when, for the ADC and the DAC,
1. the sampling rate is increased,
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
2. the number of bits in each digital number is increased.
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]

14
6 (a) State Coulomb’s law.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Two charged metal spheres A and B are situated in a vacuum, as illustrated in Fig. 6.1.
6.0 cm
sphere A sphere B
P
Fig. 6.1
The shortest distance between the surfaces of the spheres is 6.0 cm.
A movable point P lies along the line joining the centres of the two spheres, a distance x from
the surface of sphere A.
The variation with distance x of the electric field strength E at point P is shown in Fig. 6.2.
10
E / 103 V m–1
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
x / cm
–5
–10
–15
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/M/J/17

15
(i) Use Fig. 6.2 to explain whether the two spheres have charges of the same, or opposite,
sign.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) A proton is at point P where x = 5.0 cm.

Use data from Fig. 6.2 to determine the acceleration of the proton.
acceleration = ................................................. m s–2 [3]
(c) Use data from Fig. 6.2 to state the value of x at which the rate of change of electric potential
is maximum. Give the reason for the value you have chosen.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]

16
7 A capacitor consists of two parallel metal plates, separated by an insulator, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
insulator
metal
plates
Fig. 7.1
(a) Suggest why, when the capacitor is connected across the terminals of a battery, the capacitor
stores energy, not charge.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Define the capacitance of the capacitor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The capacitor is charged so that the potential difference between its plates is V0.
The capacitor is then connected across a resistor for a short time. It is then disconnected.
1
The energy stored in the capacitor is reduced to of its initial value.
16
Determine, in terms of V0, the potential difference across the capacitor.
potential difference = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/M/J/17

17
8 A student designs a circuit incorporating an operational amplifier (op-amp) as shown in Fig. 8.1.
+6 V
component C
X R
+5 V
–
+
Y R –5 V B G
RV
0V
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 8.1, draw a circle around the output device. [1]
(ii) State the purpose of this circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The resistors X and Y each have resistance R.

When conducting, the LED labelled B emits blue light and the LED labelled G emits green
light.
(i) State whether blue light or green light is emitted when the resistance of component C is
greater than the resistance RV of the variable resistor. Explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]

18
(ii) State and explain what is observed as the resistance of component C is reduced.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Suggest the function of the variable resistor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/M/J/17

19
9 A Hall probe is placed near to one end of a current-carrying solenoid, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
solenoid
Hall probe
Fig. 9.1
The probe is rotated about the axis XY and is then held in a position so that the Hall voltage is
maximum.
(a) Explain why
(i) a Hall probe is made from a thin slice of material,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) in order for consistent measurements of magnetic flux density to be made, the current in
the probe must be constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

20
(b) The probe is now rotated through an angle of 360° about the axis XY.
At angle θ = 0, the Hall voltage VH has maximum value VMAX.
On Fig. 9.2, sketch the variation with angle θ of the Hall voltage VH for one complete revolution
of the probe about axis XY.
V MAX
VH
0
0 90 180 270 360
θ /°
Fig. 9.2
[3]
[Total: 6]
10 (a) Briefly describe two phenomena associated with the photoelectric effect that cannot be
explained using a wave theory of light.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The maximum energy EMAX of electrons emitted from a metal surface when illuminated by
light of wavelength λ is given by the expression
EMAX = hc ( 1λ – λ1 )
0
where h is the Planck constant and c is the speed of light.
(i) Identify the symbol λ0.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/M/J/17

21
1
(ii) The variation with of EMAX for the metal surface is shown in Fig. 10.1.
λ
4
EMAX / 10–19 J
0
1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
1 6 –1
λ / 10 m
Fig. 10.1
1. Use Fig. 10.1 to determine the magnitude of λ0.
λ0 = ...................................................... m [1]
2. Use the gradient of Fig. 10.1 to determine a value for the Planck constant h.
h = ..................................................... J s [3]
(c) The metal surface in (b) becomes oxidised.

Photoelectric emission is still observed but the work function energy is increased.
1
On Fig. 10.1, draw a line to show the variation with of EMAX for the oxidised surface. [2]
λ
[Total: 9]

22
11 An electron has charge –q and mass m. It is accelerated from rest in a vacuum through a potential
difference V.
(a) Show that the momentum p of the accelerated electron is given by
p = (2mqV) .
[2]
(b) The potential difference V through which the electron is accelerated is 120 V.
(i) State what is meant by the de Broglie wavelength.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the de Broglie wavelength of the electron.
wavelength = ...................................................... m [3]
(c) The separation of copper atoms in a copper crystal is approximately 2 × 10–10 m.
By reference to your answer in (b)(ii), suggest whether electron diffraction could be observed
using a beam of electrons that have been accelerated through a potential difference of 120 V
and are then incident on a thin copper crystal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/M/J/17

23
12 One nuclear reaction that can take place in a nuclear reactor may be represented, in part, by the
equation
235 1 95 139
92 U + 0n 42 Mo + 57 La + 210 n + …………. + energy
Data for a nucleus and some particles are given in Fig. 12.1.
nucleus or particle mass / u

139
57 La 138.955
1
0n 1.00863
1
1p 1.00728
0
–1 e 5.49 × 10–4
Fig. 12.1
(a) Complete the nuclear reaction shown above. [1]
(b) (i) Show that the energy equivalent to 1.00 u is 934 MeV.
[3]
(ii) Calculate the binding energy per nucleon, in MeV, of lanthanum-139 ( 139
57 La).
binding energy per nucleon = ................................................ MeV [3]
Question 12 continues on the next page.

24
(c) State and explain whether the binding energy per nucleon of uranium-235 ( 235
92 U) will be
greater, equal to or less than your answer in (b)(ii).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/M/J/17

* 1 7 1 1 6 2 0 1 1 8 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
2 hours

DC (KN/SG) 144289/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/M/J/18

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
3 V

v = ± ω (x 02 - x 2)
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
radioactive decay x = x0 exp(−λt)
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A distant star is orbited by several planets. Each planet has a circular orbit with a different
radius.
(i) Each planet orbits at constant speed.

Explain whether the planets are in equilibrium.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The radius of the orbit of a planet is R and the orbital period is T.
Data for some of the planets are given in Fig. 1.1.
planet R/m T 2 / s2
c 9.6 × 1010 2.5 × 1011
e 4.0 × 1011 1.8 × 1013
g 2.1 × 1012 2.6 × 1015
Fig. 1.1
The relationship between R and T is given by the expression
R 3 = kT 2.
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/M/J/18

5
1. Show that the constant k is given by the expression
GM
k=
4π2
where G is the gravitational constant and M is the mass of the star.
[3]
2. Use data from Fig. 1.1 for the three planets and the expression for k to calculate the
mass M of the star.
M = ...................................................... kg [3]
[Total: 9]

6
2 A metal plate is made to vibrate vertically by means of an oscillator, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
sand
direction of plate
oscillations
oscillator
Fig. 2.1
Some sand is sprinkled on to the plate.
The variation with displacement y of the acceleration a of the sand on the plate is shown in
Fig. 2.2.
4
a / m s–2
3
0
–10 –8 –6 –4 –2 0 2 4 6 8 10
–1 y / mm
–2
–3
–4
–5
Fig. 2.2
(a) (i) Use Fig. 2.2 to show how it can be deduced that the sand is undergoing simple harmonic
motion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/M/J/18
7
(ii) Calculate the frequency of oscillation of the sand.
frequency = ..................................................... Hz [2]
(b) The amplitude of oscillation of the plate is gradually increased beyond 8 mm. The frequency
is constant.
At one amplitude, the sand is seen to lose contact with the plate.
For the plate when the sand first loses contact with the plate,
(i) state the position of the plate,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) calculate the amplitude of oscillation.
amplitude = ................................................... mm [3]
[Total: 8]

8
3 (a) (i) State what is meant by the internal energy of a system.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Explain why, for an ideal gas, the change in internal energy is directly proportional to the
change in thermodynamic temperature of the gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) A cylinder of volume 1.8 × 104 cm3 contains helium gas at pressure 6.4 × 106 Pa and
temperature 25 °C.
Helium gas may be considered to be an ideal gas consisting of single atoms.
Calculate the number of helium atoms in the cylinder.
number = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/M/J/18

9
4 Piezo-electric transducers are used for the generation of ultrasonic waves.
(a) State one other use, apart from in ultrasound, of piezo-electric transducers.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain the main principles behind the use of ultrasound to obtain diagnostic information
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
[Total: 7]

10
5 A geostationary satellite orbits the Earth with a period of 24 hours.
(a) State
(i) the direction of the orbit about the Earth,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the position of the satellite relative to the Earth’s surface,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) a typical frequency for communication between the satellite and Earth.
frequency = ..................................................... Hz [1]
(b) A signal transmitted from Earth to a satellite has an initial power of 3.0 kW.
The signal power received by the satellite is attenuated by 195 dB.
(i) Calculate the signal power received by the satellite.
power = ...................................................... W [3]
(ii) By reference to your answer in (i), explain why different frequencies are used for the
up-link and the down-link in communication with the satellite.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/M/J/18

11
6 (a) State what is meant by electric field strength.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) An isolated metal sphere A of radius 26 cm is positively charged. Sphere A is shown in

Fig. 6.1.
charged
sphere A
26 cm
Fig. 6.1
Electrical breakdown (a spark) occurs when the electric field strength at the surface of the
sphere exceeds 2.0 × 104 V m–1.
Calculate the maximum charge Q that can be stored on the sphere.
Q = ....................................................... C [2]
(c) A second isolated metal sphere B, also with charge +Q, has a radius of 52 cm.
Calculate the additional charge, in terms of Q, that may be stored on this sphere before
electrical breakdown occurs.
additional charge = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
12
7 (a) Explain what is meant by the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) A parallel plate capacitor C is connected into the circuit shown in Fig. 7.1.
X Y
120 V A
C
Fig. 7.1
When switch S is at position X, the battery of electromotive force 120 V and negligible internal
resistance is connected to capacitor C.
When switch S is at position Y, the capacitor C is discharged through the sensitive ammeter.
The switch vibrates so that it is first in position X, then moves to position Y and then back to
position X fifty times each second.
The current recorded on the ammeter is 4.5 μA.
Determine
(i) the charge, in coulomb, passing through the ammeter in 1.0 s,
charge = ....................................................... C [1]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/M/J/18

13
(ii) the charge on one plate of the capacitor, each time that it is charged,
charge = ....................................................... C [1]
(iii) the capacitance of capacitor C.
capacitance = ....................................................... F [2]
(c) A second capacitor, having a capacitance equal to that of capacitor C, is now placed in series
with C.
Suggest and explain the effect on the current recorded on the ammeter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]

14
8 (a) Negative feedback is often used in amplifiers incorporating an operational amplifier (op-amp).
State
(i) what is meant by negative feedback,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) two effects of negative feedback on the gain of an amplifier.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) An ideal op-amp is incorporated into the amplifier circuit shown in Fig. 8.1.
9600 Ω
+6 V
800 Ω
–
+
VIN –6 V VOUT
Fig. 8.1
(i) Calculate the gain G of the amplifier circuit.
G = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/M/J/18

15
(ii) Determine the output potential difference VOUT for input potential differences VIN of
1. – 0.10 V,
VOUT = ............................................................ V
2. +1.3 V.
VOUT = ............................................................ V
[2]
(iii) The gain of the amplifier shown in Fig. 8.1 is constant.
State one change that can be made to the circuit of Fig. 8.1 so that the amplifier circuit
monitors light intensity levels, with the magnitude of the gain decreasing as light intensity
increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]

16
9 A rigid copper wire is held horizontally between the pole pieces of two magnets, as shown in
Fig. 9.1.
8.5 cm
copper 8.5 cm
wire
S
direction S
of current
θ
N
side view top view
Fig. 9.1
The width of each pole piece is 8.5 cm.

The uniform magnetic flux density B in the region between the poles of the magnets is 3.7 mT and
is zero outside this region.
The angle between the wire and the direction of the magnetic field is θ.
The current in the wire is in the direction shown on Fig. 9.1.
(a) By reference to the side view of Fig. 9.1, state and explain the direction of the force on the
magnets.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The constant current in the wire is 5.1 A.
(i) For angle θ equal to 90°, calculate the force on the wire.
force = ....................................................... N [2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/M/J/18

17
(ii) The angle θ is changed to 60°.

The length of wire in the magnetic field is c m cm.
8 .5
sin 60°
Calculate the force on the wire.
force = ....................................................... N [1]
(c) The constant current in the wire is now changed to an alternating current of frequency 20 Hz
and root-mean-square (r.m.s.) value 5.1 A.
The angle between the wire and the direction of the magnetic field is 90°.
On Fig. 9.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the force F on the wire for two
cycles of the alternating current.
F/N
0
0 t/s
Fig. 9.2 [3]
[Total: 8]
18
10 (a) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A coil of insulated wire is wound on to one end of a ferrous core and connected to a battery,
ferrous core
aluminium
ring
coil of
insulated
wire
Fig. 10.1
An aluminium ring is placed on the core. The ring can move freely along the length of the
core.
The switch is initially open.
Use Faraday’s law and Lenz’s law to explain why the aluminium ring jumps upwards when
the switch is closed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/M/J/18
19
11 (a) (i) Explain what is meant by a photon.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) By reference to intensity of light, state one piece of evidence provided by the photoelectric
effect for a particulate nature of light.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Some electron energy levels in a solid are illustrated in Fig. 11.1.
conduction band
forbidden band
valence band
Fig. 11.1
A semiconductor material has a very high resistance in darkness.

Light incident on the semiconductor material causes its resistance to decrease.
Explain the resistance of the semiconductor material in different light conditions.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
[Total: 8]

20
12 An X-ray beam is used to produce an image of a model of a thumb.

A parallel beam of X-ray radiation of intensity I0 is incident on the model, as illustrated in Fig. 12.1.
soft tissue
bone
incident beam 1.3 cm emergent beam

intensity I0
2.8 cm
Fig. 12.1
Data for the attenuation (absorption) coefficient μ in bone and in soft tissue are shown in Fig. 12.2.
μ / cm–1
bone 3.0
soft tissue 0.90
Fig. 12.2
(a) Calculate, in terms of the incident intensity I0 of the X-ray beam, the intensity of the beam
after passing through
(i) a thickness of 2.8 cm of soft tissue,
intensity = ...................................................... I0 [2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/M/J/18

21
(ii) the bone and soft tissue, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
intensity = ...................................................... I0 [2]
(b) (i) State what is meant by the contrast of an X-ray image.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) By reference to your answers in (a), suggest whether the X-ray image of the model has
good contrast.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

22
13 (a) State what is meant by radioactive decay.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The variation with time t of the number N of technetium-101 nuclei in a sample of radioactive
material is shown in Fig. 13.1.
10.0
8.0
N / 107
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 10 20 30 40
t / min
Fig. 13.1
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/M/J/18

23
(i) Use Fig. 13.1 to determine the activity, in Bq, of the sample of technetium-101 at time
t = 14.0 minutes. Show your working.
activity = ..................................................... Bq [4]
(ii) Without calculating the half-life of technetium-101, use your answer in (i) to determine
the decay constant λ of technetium-101.
λ = .................................................... s–1 [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/M/J/18

24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/M/J/18

* 4 1 6 1 7 1 5 4 9 5 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours

DC (KN/SG) 144290/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/M/J/18

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
3 V

v = ± ω (x 02 - x 2)
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/M/J/18

5
1 (a) (i) A gravitational field may be represented by lines of gravitational force.

State what is meant by a line of gravitational force.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) By reference to lines of gravitational force near to the surface of the Earth, explain why
the gravitational field strength g close to the Earth’s surface is approximately constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The Moon may be considered to be a uniform sphere of diameter 3.4 × 103 km and mass
7.4 × 1022 kg. The Moon has no atmosphere.
During a collision of the Moon with a meteorite, a rock is thrown vertically up from the surface
of the Moon with a speed of 2.8 km s–1.
Assuming that the Moon is isolated in space, determine whether the rock will travel out into
distant space or return to the Moon’s surface.
[4]
[Total: 8]

6
2 (a) Use one of the assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases to explain why the potential energy
of the molecules of an ideal gas is zero.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The average translational kinetic energy EK of a molecule of an ideal gas is given by the
expression
1 3
EK = m 〈c 2〉 = kT
2 2
where m is the mass of a molecule and k is the Boltzmann constant.
State the meaning of the symbol
(i) 〈c 2〉,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) T.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A cylinder of constant volume 4.7 × 104 cm3 contains an ideal gas at pressure 2.6 × 105 Pa
and temperature 173 °C.
The gas is heated. The thermal energy transferred to the gas is 2900 J. The final temperature
and pressure of the gas are T and p, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1.
4.7 × 104 cm3 2900 J 4.7 × 104 cm3

2.6 × 105 Pa p
173 °C T
Fig. 2.1
(i) Calculate
1. the number N of molecules in the cylinder,
N = ...........................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/M/J/18

7
2. the increase in average kinetic energy of a molecule during the heating process.
increase = ....................................................... J [1]
(ii) Use your answer in (i) part 2 to determine the final temperature T, in kelvin, of the gas in
the cylinder.
T = ....................................................... K [3]
[Total: 10]

8
3 (a) During melting, a solid becomes liquid with little or no change in volume.
Use kinetic theory to explain why, during the melting process, thermal energy is required
although there is no change in temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) An aluminium can of mass 160 g contains a mass of 330 g of warm water at a temperature of
38 °C, as illustrated in Fig. 3.1.
ice
warm water
aluminium can
Fig. 3.1
A mass of 48 g of ice at –18 °C is taken from a freezer and put in to the water. The ice melts
and the final temperature of the can and its contents is 23 °C.
Data for the specific heat capacity c of aluminium, ice and water are given in Fig. 3.2.
c / J g–1 K–1
aluminium 0.910
ice 2.10
water 4.18
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/M/J/18

9
Assuming no exchange of thermal energy with the surroundings,
(i) show that the loss in thermal energy of the can and the warm water is 2.3 × 104 J,
[2]
(ii) use the information in (i) to calculate a value L for the specific latent heat of fusion of ice.
L = .................................................. J g–1 [2]
[Total: 7]

10
4 (a) State two conditions necessary for a mass to be undergoing simple harmonic motion.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A trolley of mass 950 g is held on a horizontal surface by means of two springs attached to
fixed points P and Q, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
trolley
mass 950 g
spring
P Q
Fig. 4.1
The springs, each having a spring constant k of 230 N m–1, are always extended.
The trolley is displaced along the line of the springs and then released.
The variation with time t of the displacement x of the trolley is shown in Fig. 4.2.
0
0 t1 t
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/M/J/18
11
(i) 1. State and explain whether the oscillations of the trolley are heavily damped, critically
damped or lightly damped.
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
2. Suggest the cause of the damping.
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) The acceleration a of the trolley of mass m may be assumed to be given by the expression
2k
a=–d nx .
m
1. Calculate the angular frequency ω of the oscillations of the trolley.
ω = ............................................... rad s–1 [3]
2. Determine the time t1 shown on Fig. 4.2.
t1 = ....................................................... s [2]
[Total: 10]

12
5 (a) In radio communication, the bandwidth of an FM transmission is greater than the bandwidth
of an AM transmission.
State
(i) what is meant by bandwidth,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) one advantage and one disadvantage of a greater bandwidth.
advantage: ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
disadvantage: ....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A carrier wave has a frequency of 650 kHz and is measured to have an amplitude of 5.0 V.
The carrier wave is frequency modulated by a signal of frequency 10 kHz and amplitude 3.0 V.
The frequency deviation of the carrier wave is 8.0 kHz V–1.
Determine, for the frequency modulated carrier wave,
(i) the measured amplitude,
amplitude = ....................................................... V [1]
(ii) the maximum and the minimum frequencies,
maximum frequency = ........................................................ kHz
minimum frequency = ........................................................ kHz

[2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/M/J/18

13
(iii) the minimum time between a maximum and a minimum transmitted frequency.
time = ........................................................ s [1]
[Total: 7]

14
6 (a) Explain what is meant by the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Three parallel plate capacitors each have a capacitance of 6.0 μF.
Draw circuit diagrams, one in each case, to show how the capacitors may be connected
together to give a combined capacitance of
(i) 9.0 μF,
[1]
(ii) 4.0 μF.
[1]
(c) Two capacitors of capacitances 3.0 μF and 2.0 μF are connected in series with a battery of
electromotive force (e.m.f.) 8.0 V, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
3.0 μF 2.0 μF
8.0 V
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/M/J/18

15
(i) Calculate the combined capacitance of the capacitors.
capacitance = ..................................................... μF [1]
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to determine, for the capacitor of capacitance 3.0 μF,
1. the charge on one plate of the capacitor,
charge = .......................................................... μC
2. the energy stored in the capacitor.
energy = ............................................................ J
[4]
[Total: 10]

16
7 (a) Negative feedback is often used in amplifiers.
State
(i) what is meant by negative feedback,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) two effects of negative feedback on the gain of an amplifier.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) An ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is incorporated into the circuit shown in Fig. 7.1.
6400 Ω
+9.0 V
–
VIN –9.0 V VOUT

800 Ω
Fig. 7.1
(i) Calculate the gain G of the amplifier circuit.
G = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/M/J/18

17
(ii) Determine the output potential difference VOUT for an input potential difference VIN of
1. +0.60 V,
VOUT = ............................................................ V
2. –2.1 V.
VOUT = ............................................................ V
[2]
(iii) The gain of the amplifier shown in Fig. 7.1 is constant.
State one change that may be made to the circuit of Fig. 7.1 so that the amplifier circuit
monitors temperature with the gain decreasing as the temperature rises.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

18
8 (a) Explain how a uniform magnetic field and a uniform electric field may be used as a velocity
selector for charged particles.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/M/J/18

19
(b) Particles having mass m and charge +1.6 × 10–19 C pass through a velocity selector.
They then enter a region of uniform magnetic field of magnetic flux density 94 mT with speed
3.4 × 104 m s–1, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
path of charged particle
velocity
selector
15.0 cm
uniform
magnetic field
into page
Fig. 8.1
The direction of the uniform magnetic field is into the page and normal to the direction in
which the particles are moving.
The particles are moving in a vacuum in a circular arc of diameter 15.0 cm.
Show that the mass of one of the particles is 20 u.
[4]
(c) On Fig. 8.1, sketch the path in the uniform magnetic field of a particle of mass 22 u having the
same charge and speed as the particle in (b). [2]
[Total: 9]

20
9 (a) State what is meant by the magnetic flux linkage of a coil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) A coil of wire has 160 turns and diameter 2.4 cm. The coil is situated in a uniform magnetic
field of flux density 7.5 mT, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
magnetic field
flux density
7.5 mT 2.4 cm
coil
160 turns
Fig. 9.1
The direction of the magnetic field is along the axis of the coil.
The magnetic flux density is reduced to zero in a time of 0.15 s.
Show that the average e.m.f. induced in the coil is 3.6 mV.
[2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/M/J/18

21
(c) The magnetic flux density B in the coil in (b) is now varied with time t as shown in Fig. 9.2.
10
B / mT
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
t/s
–5
–10
Fig. 9.2
Use data in (b) to show, on Fig. 9.3, the variation with time t of the e.m.f. E induced in the coil.
E / mV 6
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
–2 t/s
–4
–6
–8
Fig. 9.3
[4]
[Total: 9]

22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/M/J/18

23
10 (a) Describe the photoelectric effect.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Data for the work function energy Φ of two metals are shown in Fig. 10.1.
Φ/J
sodium 3.8 × 10–19
zinc 5.8 × 10–19
Fig. 10.1
Light of wavelength 420 nm is incident on the surface of each of the metals.
(i) State what is meant by a photon.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the energy of a photon of the incident light.
energy = ....................................................... J [2]
(iii) State whether photoelectric emission will occur from each of the metals.
sodium: ..............................................................................................................................
zinc: ...................................................................................................................................
[1]
[Total: 7]

24
11 (a) Describe the basic principles of CT scanning (computed tomography).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/M/J/18

25
(b) By reference to your answer in (a), suggest why
(i) CT scanning was not possible before fast computers with large memories were available,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the radiation dose for a CT scan is much larger than for an X-ray image of a leg bone.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

26
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) An unstable nuclide P has decay constant λP and decays to form a nuclide D.
This nuclide D is unstable and decays with decay constant λD to form a stable nuclide S. The
decay chain is illustrated in Fig. 12.1.
decay constant decay constant

λP λD
nuclide P nuclide D nuclide S
Fig. 12.1
The symbols P, D and S are not the nuclide symbols.
Initially, a radioactive sample contains only nuclide P.
The variation with time t of the number of nuclei of each of the three nuclides in the sample is
shown in Fig. 12.2.
number
0
0 t
Fig. 12.2
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/M/J/18
27
(i) On Fig. 12.2, use the symbols P, D and S to identify the curve for each of the three
nuclides. [2]
(ii) The half-life of nuclide P is 60.0 minutes.
Calculate the decay constant λP, in s–1, of this nuclide.
λP = ..................................................... s–1 [2]
(c) In the decay chain shown in Fig. 12.1, λP is approximately equal to 5λD.
The decay chain of a different nuclide E is illustrated in Fig. 12.3.
decay constant decay constant

λE λF
nuclide E nuclide F nuclide G
Fig. 12.3
The decay constant λF of nuclide F is very much larger than the decay constant λE of
nuclide E.
By reference to the half-life of nuclide F, explain why the number of nuclei of nuclide F in the
sample is always small.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/M/J/18

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/M/J/18

* 3 0 4 2 9 2 1 3 1 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
2 hours

DC (KS/CB) 162211/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/M/J/19

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas W = pΔV
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
3 V

v = ± ω (x 02 - x 2)
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
alternating current/voltage x = x0 sin ωt
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 (a) Two point masses are isolated in space and are separated by a distance x.
State an expression relating the gravitational force F between the two masses to the
magnitudes M and m of the masses. State the name of any other symbol used.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A spacecraft is to be put into a circular orbit about a spherical planet.
The planet may be considered to be isolated in space. The mass of the planet, assumed to
be concentrated at its centre, is 7.5 × 1023 kg. The radius of the planet is 3.4 × 106 m.
(i) The spacecraft is to orbit the planet at a height of 2.4 × 105 m above the surface of the
planet. At this altitude, there is no atmosphere.
Show that the speed of the spacecraft in its orbit is 3.7 × 103 m s –1.
[2]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/M/J/19

5
(ii) One possible path of the spacecraft as it approaches the planet is shown in Fig. 1.1.
3.64 × 106 m
B
5.00 × 107 m
planet
mass 7.5 × 1023 kg
The spacecraft enters the orbit at point A with speed 3.7 × 103 m s–1.
At point B, a distance of 5.00 × 107 m from the centre of the planet, the spacecraft has a
speed of 4.1 × 103 m s–1. The mass of the spacecraft is 650 kg.
For the spacecraft moving from point B to point A, show that the change in gravitational
potential energy of the spacecraft is 8.3 × 109 J.
[3]
(c) By considering changes in gravitational potential energy and in kinetic energy of the
spacecraft, determine whether the total energy of the spacecraft increases or decreases in
moving from point B to point A. A numerical answer is not required.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]

6
2 A fixed mass of an ideal gas has volume 210 cm3 at pressure 3.0 × 105 Pa and temperature 270 K.
The volume of the gas is reduced at constant pressure to 140 cm3, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
210 cm3 140 cm3

3.0 × 105 Pa 3.0 × 105 Pa
270 K T
Fig. 2.1
The final temperature of the gas is T.
(a) Determine:
(i) the amount of gas
amount = ................................................... mol [3]
(ii) the final temperature T of the gas
T = .......................................................K [2]
(iii) the external work done on the gas.
work done = ....................................................... J [2]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/M/J/19

7
(b) For this change in volume and temperature of the gas, the thermal energy transferred is 53 J.
Determine ΔU, the change in internal energy of the gas.
ΔU = ....................................................... J [3]
[Total: 10]

8
3 A hollow tube, sealed at one end, has a cross-sectional area A of 24 cm2.

The tube contains sand so that the total mass M of the tube and sand is 0.23 kg.
The tube floats upright in a liquid of density t, as illustrated in Fig. 3.1.
tube, area
of cross-section A
liquid, density t
h
sand
Fig. 3.1
The depth of the bottom of the tube below the liquid surface is h.
The tube is displaced vertically and then released. The variation with time t of the depth h is shown
in Fig. 3.2.
h / cm
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4
t/s
Fig. 3.2
(a) Determine:
(i) the amplitude, in metres, of the oscillations
amplitude = ...................................................... m [1]

© UCLES 2019 9702/41/M/J/19
9
(ii) the frequency of oscillation of the tube in the liquid
frequency = .....................................................Hz [2]
(iii) the acceleration of the tube when h is a maximum.
acceleration = .................................................m s–2 [2]
(b) The frequency f of oscillation of the tube is given by the expression

A tg
f=
1 c m
2π M
where g is the acceleration of free fall.
Calculate the density t of the liquid in which the tube is floating.
t = ...............................................kg m–3 [2]
(c) The oscillations illustrated in Fig. 3.2 are undamped. In practice, the liquid does cause light
damping.
On Fig. 3.2, draw a line to show light damping of the oscillations for time t = 0 to time t = 1.4 s.
[3]
[Total: 10]

10
4 (a) During the transmission of a signal, attenuation occurs and noise is picked up.
(i) attenuation
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) noise.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) By reference to (a)(ii), explain the advantage of the transmission of the signal in digital form
rather than in analogue form.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Part of an analogue signal is shown in Fig. 4.1.
10
signal
voltage
/ mV
8
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
time t / ms
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/M/J/19

11
The signal is to be transmitted in digital form.
The analogue signal is sampled at a frequency of 1.0 × 103 Hz using an analogue-to-digital

converter (ADC). The ADC produces 4-bit numbers.
The times t at which the analogue signal is sampled are shown in Fig. 4.2.
time
t / ms 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
digital
number 0010 0110 0100 0101 ……… ……… ………
Fig. 4.2
On Fig. 4.2:
(i) for the digital number at time t = 3.0 ms, underline the least significant bit (LSB) [1]
(ii) state the digital numbers corresponding to the sampling times between time t = 4.0 ms
and time t = 6.0 ms. [2]
(d) The transmitted digital signal is converted back to an analogue signal using a digital-to-
analogue converter (DAC).
On Fig. 4.3, show the variation with time t of the output levels of the DAC for time t = 0 to
time t = 4.0 ms. Assume that there is negligible time delay in the transmission line.
output
level
6
0
0 1 2 3 4
time t / ms
Fig. 4.3
[3]
[Total: 10]

12
5 (a) State what is meant by electric field strength.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Two point charges A and B are situated a distance 15 cm apart in a vacuum, as illustrated in
Fig. 5.1.
A P B
15 cm
Fig. 5.1
Point P lies on the line joining the charges and is a distance x from charge A.
10
8
E / 103 N C –1
6
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
x / cm
–2
–4
–6
Fig. 5.2
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/M/J/19

13
(i) By reference to the direction of the electric field, state and explain whether the charges
A and B have the same, or opposite, signs.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State why, although charge A is a point charge, the electric field strength between
x = 3 cm and x = 7 cm does not obey an inverse-square law.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Use Fig. 5.2 to determine the ratio
magnitude of charge A
.
magnitude of charge B
ratio = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]

14
6 (a) State two different functions of capacitors in electrical circuits.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Three uncharged capacitors of capacitances C1, C2 and C3 are connected in series with a
battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) E and a switch, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
C1 C2 C3
plate P
charge +q
Fig. 6.1
When the switch is closed, there is a charge + q on plate P of the capacitor of capacitance C1.
Show that the combined capacitance C of the three capacitors is given by the expression
1 1 1 1
= + + .
C C1 C2 C3
[3]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/M/J/19

15
(c) A student has available four capacitors, each of capacitance 20 μF.
Draw circuit diagrams, one in each case, to show how the student may connect some or all of
the capacitors to produce a combined capacitance of:
(i) 60 μF
[1]
(ii) 15 μF.
[1]
[Total: 7]

16
7 The circuit for an inverting amplifier incorporating an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is shown
in Fig. 7.1.
5.2 k
0.80 k +5 V
–
P
+
–5 V R
VIN VOUT
D
Fig. 7.1
(a) For the circuit of Fig. 7.1:
(i) explain why point P is known as a virtual earth
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) calculate the gain of the amplifier.
gain = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/M/J/19

17
(b) When the op-amp is saturated, the potential difference across the LED is 2.3 V.
Calculate the minimum resistance of resistor R so that the current in the LED is limited to
30 mA.
resistance = ..................................................... Ω [3]
[Total: 8]

18
8 A solenoid is connected in series with a battery and a switch, as illustrated in Fig. 8.1.
small coil
A
solenoid
axis of
solenoid
Fig. 8.1
A small coil, connected to a sensitive ammeter, is situated near one end of the solenoid.
As the current in the solenoid is switched on, there is a changing magnetic field inside the solenoid.
(a) (i) State what is meant by a magnetic field.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, draw an arrow on the axis of the solenoid to show the direction of the
magnetic field inside the solenoid. Label this arrow P. [1]
(b) As the current in the solenoid is switched on, there is a current induced in the small coil. This
induced current gives rise to a magnetic field in the small coil.
(i) State Lenz’s law.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/M/J/19

19
(ii) Use Lenz’s law to state and explain the direction of the magnetic field due to the induced
current in the small coil. On Fig. 8.1, mark this direction with an arrow inside the small
coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) The small coil has an area of cross-section 7.0 × 10–4 m2 and contains 75 turns of wire.
A constant current in the solenoid produces a uniform magnetic flux of flux density 1.4 mT
throughout the small coil.
The direction of the current in the solenoid is reversed in a time of 0.12 s.
Calculate the average e.m.f. induced in the small coil.
e.m.f. = .......................................................V [3]
[Total: 10]

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/M/J/19

21
9 Nuclear magnetic resonance imaging (NMRI) is used to obtain diagnostic information about
internal body structures.
State, during the use of NMRI, the function of:
(a) the large constant magnetic field
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) the non-uniform magnetic field.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]

22
10 A bridge rectifier contains four diodes. The output of the rectifier is connected to a resistor R, as
shown in Fig. 10.1.
bridge output
input rectifier resistor R
Fig. 10.1
The variation with time t of the input e.m.f. E to the rectifier is given by the expression
E = 15 cos(210t )
where t is measured in seconds and E in volts.
The variation with time t of the potential difference V across resistor R is shown in Fig. 10.2.
0
t1 t2
time t
Fig. 10.2
Determine:
(a) the maximum potential difference VMAX across resistor R
VMAX = .......................................................V [1]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/M/J/19

23
(b) the time interval, to two significant figures, between time t1 and time t2.
time = ....................................................... s [3]
[Total: 4]

24
11 (a) State three pieces of evidence provided by the photoelectric effect for a particulate nature of
electromagnetic radiation.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) The work function energies of some metals are shown in Fig. 11.1.
work function
energy / eV
sodium 2.4
calcium 2.9
zinc 3.6
silver 4.3
Fig. 11.1
Each metal is irradiated with electromagnetic radiation of wavelength 380 nm.
(i) Calculate the energy, in eV, of a photon of electromagnetic radiation of wavelength 380 nm.
energy = ......................................................eV [3]
(ii) Determine which metals will give rise to the emission of photoelectrons. Explain your
answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/M/J/19

25
(c) Photons of wavelength 380 nm are incident normally on a metal surface at a rate of
7.6 × 1014 s–1.
All the photons are absorbed in the surface and no photoelectrons are emitted.
Calculate the force exerted on the metal surface by the incident photons.
force = ...................................................... N [3]
[Total: 11]

26
12 (a) A sample of a radioactive isotope contains N nuclei of the isotope at time T.

At time (T + ΔT ), the sample contains (N – ΔN ) nuclei of the isotope. The time interval ΔT is
short.
Use the symbols N, ΔN, T and ΔT to give expressions for:
(i) the average activity of the sample during the time ΔT
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the probability of decay of a nucleus in the time ΔT
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) the decay constant λ of the isotope.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The isotope polonium-208 (208 (204Pb).

84 Po) is radioactive and decays to form lead-204 82
The nuclear equation for this decay is
208 Po 204 Pb
84 82
+ 42 He.
Data for nuclear masses are given in Fig. 12.1.
mass / u
4 He
2 4.002 603
204 Pb
82 203.973 043
208 Po
84 207.981 245
Fig. 12.1
(i) Determine, for the decay of one nucleus of polonium-208:
1. the change, in u, of the mass
mass change = ....................................................... u [1]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/M/J/19

27
2. the total energy, in pJ, released.
energy = ..................................................... pJ [3]
(ii) The polonium-208 nucleus is initially stationary. The initial kinetic energy of the
4 He nucleus (α-particle) is found to be less than the energy calculated in (i) part 2.
2
Suggest two possible reasons for this difference.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/M/J/19

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/M/J/19

* 9 3 1 8 5 4 1 2 3 7 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours

DC (LEG/TP) 162132/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/M/J/19

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
3 V

v = ± ω (x 02 - x 2)
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
alternating current/voltage x = x0 sin ωt
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 (a) Two point masses are separated by a distance x in a vacuum.

State an expression for the force F between the two masses M and m.
State the name of any other symbol used.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A small sphere S is attached to one end of a rod, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
thread
rod
small sphere S
8.0 cm
view from side
The rod hangs from a vertical thread and is horizontal.

The distance from the centre of sphere S to the thread is 8.0 cm.
A large sphere L is placed near to sphere S, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
large sphere L
initial position
of rod
6.0 cm
final position
of rod θ
1.2 mm
small sphere S
8.0 cm
thread
view from above
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/M/J/19

5
There is a force of attraction between spheres S and L, causing sphere S to move through a
distance of 1.2 mm.
The line joining the centres of S and L is normal to the rod.
(i) Show that the angle θ through which the rod rotates is 1.5 × 10–2 rad.
[1]
(ii) The rotation of the rod causes the thread to twist.

The torque T (in N m) required to twist the thread through an angle β (in rad) is given by
T = 9.3 × 10–10 × β.
Calculate the torque in the thread when sphere L is positioned as shown in Fig. 1.2.
torque = .................................................. N m [1]
(c) The distance between the centres of spheres S and L is 6.0 cm.
The mass of sphere S is 7.5 g and the mass of sphere L is 1.3 kg.
(i) By equating the torque in (b)(ii) to the moment about the thread produced by gravitational
attraction between the spheres, calculate a value for the gravitational constant.
gravitational constant = ............................................... N m2 kg–2 [3]

6
(ii) Suggest why the total force between the spheres may not be equal to the force calculated
using Newton’s law of gravitation.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/M/J/19

7
2 (a) The first law of thermodynamics may be expressed in the form
ΔU = q + w.
(i) State, for a system, what is meant by:
1. +q
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. +w.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State what is represented by a negative value of ΔU.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

8
(b) An ideal gas, sealed in a container, undergoes the cycle of changes shown in Fig. 2.1.
7.0
B 8.7 × 10–4 m3
6.6 × 105 Pa
450 K
6.0
pressure
/ 105 Pa
5.0
4.0
2.4 × 10–3 m3
3.0 1.6 × 105 Pa
8.7 × 10–4 m3 300 K
1.6 × 105 Pa
110 K
2.0
C A
1.0
0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
volume / 10–3 m3
Fig. 2.1
At point A, the gas has volume 2.4 × 10–3 m3, pressure 1.6 × 105 Pa and temperature 300 K.
The gas is compressed suddenly so that no thermal energy enters or leaves the gas during
the compression. The amount of work done is 480 J so that, at point B, the gas has volume
8.7 × 10–4 m3, pressure 6.6 × 105 Pa and temperature 450 K.
The gas is now cooled at constant volume so that, between points B and C, 1100 J of thermal
energy is transferred. At point C, the gas has pressure 1.6 × 105 Pa and temperature 110 K.
Finally, the gas is returned to point A.
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/M/J/19

9
(i) State and explain the total change in internal energy of the gas for one complete
cycle ABCA.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the external work done on the gas during the expansion from point C to
point A.
work done = ...................................................... J [2]
(iii) Complete Fig. 2.2 for the changes from:
1. point A to point B
2. point B to point C
3. point C to point A.
change +q / J +w / J ΔU / J
A B .................... .................... ....................
B C .................... .................... ....................
C A .................... .................... ....................
Fig. 2.2
[4]
[Total: 11]

10
3 A spring is hung vertically from a fixed point. A mass M is hung from the other end of the spring, as
spring
mass M
Fig. 3.1
The mass is displaced downwards and then released. The subsequent motion of the mass is
simple harmonic.
The variation with time t of the length L of the spring is shown in Fig. 3.2.
16
L / cm
14
12
10
8
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
t/s
Fig. 3.2
(a) State:
(i) one time at which the mass is moving with maximum speed
time = ..................................................... s [1]
(ii) one time at which the spring has maximum elastic potential energy.
time = ...................................................... s [1]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/M/J/19

11
(b) Use data from Fig. 3.2 to determine, for the motion of the mass:
(i) the angular frequency ω
ω = .............................................. rad s–1 [2]
(ii) the maximum speed
maximum speed = ................................................ m s–1 [2]
(iii) the magnitude of the maximum acceleration.
maximum acceleration = ................................................ m s–2 [2]

12
(c) The mass M is now suspended from two springs, each identical to that in Fig. 3.1, as shown
in Fig. 3.3.
mass M
Fig. 3.3
Suggest and explain the change, if any, in the period of oscillation of the mass. A numerical
answer is not required.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/M/J/19

13
4 (a) State what is meant by the specific acoustic impedance of a medium.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A parallel beam of ultrasound of intensity I0 is incident on the boundary between two media
A and B, as illustrated in Fig. 4.1.
medium A medium B
specific acoustic impedance ZA specific acoustic impedance ZB
incident transmitted
Fig. 4.1
The two media A and B have specific acoustic impedances ZA and ZB respectively.
The intensity of the beam transmitted through the boundary is IT.
State how the ratio

intensity IT of transmitted beam
intensity I0 of incident beam
depends on the relative magnitudes of ZA and ZB.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The linear absorption (attenuation) coefficient μ of medium B is 23 m–1.
Calculate the thickness of medium B required to reduce the intensity of the ultrasound beam
to 34% of its initial intensity in medium B.
thickness = ..................................................... m [3]
[Total: 7]
14
5 (a) For a signal transmitted along an optic fibre, state what is meant by:
(i) attenuation
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) noise.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The initial section of the transmission line for a signal from a telephone exchange is illustrated
in Fig. 5.1.
52 km
exchange amplifier
gain 115 dB
Fig. 5.1
At the exchange, the input signal to the transmission line has a power of 2.5 × 10–3 W.
After the signal has travelled a distance of 52 km along the transmission line, the power of the
signal is 7.8 × 10–16 W. The signal is then amplified.
(i) Calculate the attenuation per unit length, in dB km–1, in the transmission line.
attenuation per unit length = ........................................... dB km–1 [3]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/M/J/19

15
(ii) The gain of the amplifier is 115 dB.
Calculate the power of the signal at the output of the amplifier.
power = ..................................................... W [2]
[Total: 8]

16
6 (a) State what is meant by electric potential at a point.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Two parallel metal plates A and B are held a distance d apart in a vacuum, as illustrated
in Fig. 6.1.
plate B
+V0
x
P
d
0V
plate A
Fig. 6.1
Plate A is earthed and plate B is at a potential of +V0.
Point P is situated in the centre region between the plates at a distance x from plate B.
The potential at point P is V.
On Fig. 6.2, show the variation with x of the potential V for values of x from x = 0 to
x = d.
+V0
potential
V
0
0 d
distance x
Fig. 6.2
[3]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/M/J/19

17
(c) Two isolated solid metal spheres M and N, each of radius R, are situated in a vacuum. Their
centres are a distance D apart, as illustrated in Fig. 6.3.
sphere M sphere N
charge +Q charge +Q
P
R R
Fig. 6.3
Each sphere has charge +Q.
Point P lies on the line joining the centres of the two spheres, and is a distance y from the
centre of sphere M.
On Fig. 6.4, show the variation with distance y of the electric potential at point P, for values of
y from y = 0 to y = D.
potential
0
0 R (D – R) D
y
Fig. 6.4
[4]
[Total: 9]

18
7 (a) Use band theory to explain why the resistance of an intrinsic semiconductor decreases as its
temperature rises.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
(b) The variation with temperature t of the resistance R of a thermistor is shown in Fig. 7.1.
3.5
3.0
R / kΩ
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
t / °C
Fig. 7.1
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/M/J/19

19
The thermistor is connected into the circuit shown in Fig. 7.2.
12.0 kΩ
9.00 V A
Fig. 7.2
The battery has electromotive force (e.m.f.) 9.00 V and negligible internal resistance.
When the temperature of the thermistor is 25 °C, the potential difference between the
terminals A and B is 1.00 V.
The temperature of the thermistor changes from 25 °C to 10 °C.

Determine, to two significant figures, the change in potential difference between A and B.
change = ...................................................... V [3]
(c) The temperature of the thermistor in (b) changes from 25 °C to 10 °C at a constant rate.
State two reasons why the potential difference between A and B does not change at a
constant rate.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]

20
8 An electron is travelling in a vacuum at a speed of 3.4 × 107 m s–1. The electron enters a region of
uniform magnetic field of flux density 3.2 mT, as illustrated in Fig. 8.1.
region of uniform
magnetic flux
density 3.2 mT
30°
electron
speed 3.4 × 107 m s–1
Fig. 8.1
The initial direction of the electron is at an angle of 30° to the direction of the magnetic field.
(a) When the electron enters the magnetic field, the component of its velocity vN normal to the
direction of the magnetic field causes the electron to begin to follow a circular path.
Calculate:
(i) vN
vN = ................................................ m s–1 [1]
(ii) the radius of this circular path.
radius = ..................................................... m [3]
(b) State the magnitude of the force, if any, on the electron in the magnetic field due to the
component of its velocity along the direction of the field.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/M/J/19

21
(c) Use information from (a) and (b) to describe the resultant path of the electron in the magnetic
field.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]

22
9 Part of a circuit incorporating an operational amplifier (op-amp) is shown in Fig. 9.1.
device +5 V
–
4.5 V +
–5 V
Fig. 9.1
(a) A relay is connected to the output of the op-amp circuit so that a lamp may be switched on
or off.
(i) Complete Fig. 9.1 to show the relay connected into the circuit. [2]
(ii) State and explain whether the output of the op-amp is positive or negative for the lamp to
be switched on.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) State the device in Fig. 9.1 that could be used so that the circuit indicates a change in:
(i) the bending of a rod
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the level of daylight to switch on a street light.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/M/J/19

23
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) An ideal transformer is illustrated in Fig. 10.1.
soft-iron
core
E load
resistor
primary coil secondary coil

2700 turns 450 turns
Fig. 10.1
Explain why, when there is an alternating current in the primary coil, there is a current in the
load resistor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]

24
(c) The primary coil in (b) has 2700 turns. The secondary coil has 450 turns.
The e.m.f. E applied across the primary coil is given by the expression
E = 220 sin(100πt )
where E is measured in volts and t is the time in seconds.
Calculate the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) e.m.f. induced in the secondary coil.
r.m.s. e.m.f. = ...................................................... V [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/M/J/19

25
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A stationary cobalt-60 (60

27Co) nucleus emits a γ-ray photon of energy 1.18 MeV.
(i) Calculate the wavelength of the photon.
wavelength = ..................................................... m [2]
(ii) Show that the momentum of the photon is 6.3 × 10–22 N s.
[2]
(c) Use information in (b)(ii) to determine the recoil speed of the cobalt-60 nucleus when the
γ-ray photon is emitted.
speed = ................................................ m s–1 [2]
[Total: 8]

26
12 (a) State what is meant by the binding energy of a nucleus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Some masses are shown in Fig. 12.1.
mass / u
proton (11p) 1.007
neutron (10n) 1.009
lanthanum-141 (141
57La) nucleus 140.911
Fig. 12.1
Calculate the binding energy of a nucleus of lanthanum-141.
binding energy = ....................................................... J [4]
(c) The nuclide lanthanum-141 (141

57La) has a half-life of 3.9 hours.
Initially, a radioactive source contains only lanthanum-141. The initial activity of the source
is A0.
(i) Calculate the time for the activity of the lanthanum-141 to be reduced to 0.40A0.
time = .............................................. hours [3]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/M/J/19

27
(ii) Suggest why the total activity of the radioactive source measured at the time calculated
in (i) may be greater than 0.40A0.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/M/J/19

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/M/J/19

* 0 3 0 6 4 4 7 3 0 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
2 hours
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (LK/CB) 180507/2
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/M/J/20

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± ω (x 02 - x 2)
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 (a) State what is meant by a gravitational force.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A binary star system consists of two stars S1 and S2, each in a circular orbit.
The orbit of each star in the system has a period of rotation T.
Observations of the binary star from Earth are represented in Fig. 1.1.
S1
S1
S2
S2
T
t=0 t=—
4
S2
S1 S2
S1
T 3T
t=— t=—
2 4
S1
S2
t=T
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/M/J/20
5
Observed from Earth, the angular separation of the centres of S1 and S2 is 1.2 × 10–5 rad.
The distance of the binary star system from Earth is 1.5 × 1017 m.
Show that the separation d of the centres of S1 and S2 is 1.8 × 1012 m.
[1]
(c) The stars S1 and S2 rotate with the same angular velocity ω about a point P, as illustrated in
Fig. 1.2.
P
S1 S2
Point P is at a distance x from the centre of star S1.

The period of rotation of the stars is 44.2 years.
(i) Calculate the angular velocity ω.
ω = .............................................. rad s–1 [2]

6
(ii) By considering the forces acting on the two stars, show that the ratio of the masses of
the stars is given by
mass of S1 d – x
= .
mass of S2 x
[2]
(iii) The mass M1 of star S1 is given by the expression
GM1 = d 2 (d – x) ω 2
The ratio in (ii) is found to be 1.5.
Use data from (b) and your answer in (c)(i) to determine the mass M1.
M1 = .................................................... kg [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/M/J/20

7
2 (a) State what is meant by the internal energy of a system.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) By reference to intermolecular forces, explain why the change in internal energy of an ideal
gas is equal to the change in total kinetic energy of its molecules.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) State and explain the change, if any, in the internal energy of a solid metal ball as it falls
under gravity in a vacuum.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]

8
3 The piston in the cylinder of a car engine moves in the cylinder with simple harmonic motion.
The piston moves between a position of maximum height in the cylinder to a position of minimum
height, as illustrated in Fig. 3.1.
cylinder cylinder
9.8 cm
piston
piston
maximum height minimum height
Fig. 3.1
The distance moved by the piston between the positions shown in Fig. 3.1 is 9.8 cm.
The mass of the piston is 640 g.
At one particular speed of the engine, the piston completes 2700 oscillations in 1.0 minute.
(a) For the oscillations of the piston in the cylinder, determine:
(i) the amplitude
amplitude = ................................................... cm [1]
(ii) the frequency
frequency = .................................................... Hz [1]
(iii) the maximum speed
maximum speed = ................................................ m s–1 [2]

© UCLES 2020 9702/41/M/J/20
9
(iv) the speed when the top of the piston is 2.3 cm below its maximum height.
speed = ............................................... m s–1 [2]
(b) The acceleration of the piston varies.
Determine the resultant force on the piston that gives rise to its maximum acceleration.
force = ..................................................... N [3]
[Total: 9]

10
4 (a) (i) By reference to an ultrasound wave, explain what is meant by specific acoustic impedance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) An ultrasound wave is incident normally on the boundary between two media. The media
have specific acoustic impedances Z1 and Z2.
State how the ratio
intensity of ultrasound reflected from boundary

intensity of ultrasound incident on boundary
depends on the relative magnitudes of Z1 and Z2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) State what is meant by the attenuation of an ultrasound wave.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) A parallel beam of ultrasound is passing through a medium.

The incident intensity I0 is reduced to 0.35 I0 on passing through a thickness of 0.046 m
of the medium.
Calculate the linear attenuation coefficient μ of the ultrasound beam in the medium.
μ = .................................................. m–1 [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/M/J/20

11
5 (a) State one similarity and one difference between the fields of force produced by an isolated
point charge and by an isolated point mass.
similarity: ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
difference: .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) An isolated solid metal sphere A of radius R has charge +Q, as illustrated in Fig. 5.1.
R
P
2R
sphere A
charge +Q
Fig. 5.1
A point P is distance 2R from the surface of the sphere.
Determine an expression that includes the terms R and Q for the electric field strength E at
point P.
E = ......................................................... [2]

12
(c) A second identical solid metal sphere B is now placed near sphere A. The centres of the
spheres are separated by a distance 6R, as shown in Fig. 5.2.
R R
P
sphere A sphere B
charge +Q 6R charge –Q
Fig. 5.2
Point P lies midway between spheres A and B.
Sphere B has charge –Q.
Explain why:
(i) the magnitude of the electric field strength at P is given by the sum of the magnitudes of
the field strengths due to each sphere
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the electric field strength at point P due to the charged metal spheres is not, in practice,
equal to 2E, where E is the electric field strength determined in (b).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/M/J/20

13
6 (a) The transmission of signals using optic fibres has, to a great extent, replaced the use of
coaxial cables.
Advantages of optic fibres include greater bandwidth and very little crosslinking.
(i) Suggest an advantage of greater bandwidth.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State what is meant by crosslinking.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In telecommunications, a signal power of 1.0 mW is used as a reference power.

Signal powers relative to this reference power and expressed in dB are said to be measured
in ‘dBm’.
Show that a signal power of 13 dBm is equivalent to 20 mW.
[2]
(c) A signal of input power 20 mW is transmitted along an optic fibre for an uninterrupted distance
of 45 km.
The optic fibre has an attenuation per unit length of 0.18 dB km–1.
Calculate the output power P from the optic fibre.
P = .................................................. mW [2]
[Total: 7]
14
7 The output of a microphone is processed using a non-inverting amplifier. The amplifier incorporates
an operational amplifier (op-amp).
(a) State, by reference to the input and output signals, the function of a non-inverting amplifier.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The circuit for the microphone and amplifier is shown in Fig. 7.1.
15 kΩ
+5 V
–
P
+
–5 V
VOUT
2.0 kΩ R
Fig. 7.1
The output potential difference VOUT is 2.6 V when the potential at point P is 84 mV.
Determine:
(i) the gain of the amplifier circuit
gain = ......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/M/J/20

15
(ii) the resistance of resistor R.
resistance = ..................................................... Ω [2]
(c) For the circuit of Fig. 7.1:
(i) suggest a suitable device to connect to the output such that the shape of the waveform
of the sound received by the microphone may be examined
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) state and explain the effect on the output potential difference VOUT of increasing the
resistance of resistor R.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

16
8 (a) Define the tesla.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A magnet produces a uniform magnetic field of flux density B in the space between its poles.
A rigid copper wire carrying a current is balanced on a pivot. Part PQLM of the wire is between
the poles of the magnet, as illustrated in Fig. 8.1.
5.6 cm
P L
weight W
N S
Q rigid copper
wire
pivot
magnet
The wire is balanced horizontally by means of a small weight W.
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/M/J/20

17
The section of the wire between the poles of the magnet is shown in Fig. 8.2.
rigid copper wire
P
L
N S
Q
pole of magnet pole of magnet
Explain why:
(i) section QL of the wire gives rise to a moment about the pivot
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) sections PQ and LM of the wire do not affect the equilibrium of the wire.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

18
(c) Section QL of the wire has length 0.85 cm.
The perpendicular distance of QL from the pivot is 5.6 cm.
When the current in the wire is changed by 1.2 A, W is moved a distance of 2.6 cm along the
wire in order to restore equilibrium. The mass of W is 1.3 × 10–4 kg.
(i) Show that the change in moment of W about the pivot is 3.3 × 10–5 N m.
[2]
(ii) Use the information in (i) to determine the magnetic flux density B between the poles of
the magnet.
B = ...................................................... T [3]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/M/J/20

19
BLANK PAGE

20
9 (a) A coil of wire is situated in a uniform magnetic field of flux density B.

The coil has diameter 3.6 cm and consists of 350 turns of wire, as illustrated in Fig. 9.1.
uniform
magnetic field 3.6 cm
flux density B
coil, 350 turns
Fig. 9.1
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/M/J/20

21
The variation with time t of B is shown in Fig. 9.2.
50
40
B / mT
30
20
10
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
t/s
Fig. 9.2
(i) Show that, for the time t = 0 to time t = 0.20 s, the electromotive force (e.m.f.) induced in
the coil is 0.080 V.
[2]
(ii) On the axes of Fig. 9.3, show the variation with time t of the induced e.m.f. E for time
t = 0 to time t = 0.80 s.
0.2
E/V
0.1
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
t/s
–0.1
–0.2
Fig. 9.3
[4]
22
(b) A bar magnet is held a small distance above the surface of an aluminium disc by means of a
rod, as illustrated in Fig. 9.4.
rotating
fixed magnet
aluminium
disc
Fig. 9.4
The aluminium disc is supported horizontally and held stationary.
The magnet is rotated about a vertical axis at constant speed.
Use laws of electromagnetic induction to explain why there is a torque acting on the aluminium
disc.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/M/J/20

23
10 (a) White light passes through a cloud of cool low-pressure gas, as illustrated in Fig. 10.1.
cool gas
white emergent
light light
Fig. 10.1
For light that has passed through the gas, its continuous spectrum is seen to contain a
number of darker lines.
Use the concept of discrete electron energy levels to explain the existence of these darker
lines.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]

24
(b) The uppermost electron energy bands in a solid are illustrated in Fig. 10.2.
conduction band (CB)
forbidden band (FB)
valence band (VB)
Fig. 10.2
Use band theory to explain the dependence on light intensity of the resistance of a
light-dependent resistor (LDR).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/M/J/20

25
11 An electron, at rest, has mass me and charge –q.
A positron is a particle that, at rest, has mass me and charge +q.
A positron interacts with an electron. The electron and the positron may be considered to be at
rest.
The outcome of this interaction is that the electron and the positron become two gamma-ray (γ-ray)
photons, each having the same energy.
(a) Calculate, for one of the γ-ray photons:
(i) the photon energy, in J
energy = ...................................................... J [2]
(ii) its momentum.
momentum = ................................................... N s [2]
(b) State and explain the direction, relative to each other, in which the γ-ray photons are emitted.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]

26
12 (a) The decay of a sample of a radioactive isotope is said to be random and spontaneous.
Explain what is meant by the decay being:
(i) random
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) spontaneous.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A radioactive isotope X has a half-life of 1.4 hours.
Initially, a pure sample of this isotope X has an activity of 3.6 × 105 Bq.
Determine the activity of the isotope X in the sample after a time of 2.0 hours.
activity = .................................................... Bq [3]
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/M/J/20

27
(c) The variation with time t of the actual activity A of the sample in (b) is shown in Fig. 12.1.
A / 105 Bq
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
t / hours
Fig. 12.1
(i) The initial activity of isotope X in the sample is 3.6 × 105 Bq.
Use information from (b) to sketch, on the axes of Fig. 12.1, the variation with time t of
the activity of a pure sample of isotope X. [1]
(ii) Suggest an explanation for any difference between the actual activity of the sample
shown in Fig. 12.1 and the curve you have drawn for the activity of isotope X.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/M/J/20

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/M/J/20

* 5 9 9 5 0 4 0 7 4 1 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (SC/TP) 180506/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/M/J/20

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± ω (x 02 - x 2)
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) An isolated solid sphere of radius r may be assumed to have its mass M concentrated at its
centre. The magnitude of the gravitational potential at the surface of the sphere is φ.
On Fig. 1.1, show the variation of the gravitational potential with distance d from the centre of
the sphere for values of d from d = r to d = 4r.
+1.0 φ
gravitational
potential
+0.5 φ
0
0 r 2r 3r 4r
d
–0.5 φ
–1.0 φ
Fig. 1.1
[3]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/M/J/20

5
(c) The sphere in (b) is a planet with radius r of 6.4 × 106 m and mass M of 6.0 × 1024 kg. The
planet has no atmosphere.
A rock of mass 3.4 × 103 kg moves directly towards the planet. Its distance from the centre of
the planet changes from 4r to 3r.
(i) Calculate the change in gravitational potential energy of the rock.
change = ....................................................... J [3]
(ii) Explain whether the rock’s speed increases, decreases or stays the same.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]

6
2 (a) A square box of volume V contains N molecules of an ideal gas. Each molecule has mass m.
Using the kinetic theory of ideal gases, it can be shown that, if all the molecules are moving
with speed v at right angles to one face of the box, the pressure p exerted on the face of the
box is given by the expression
pV = Nmv 2. (equation 1)
This expression leads to the formula

1
p = ρ 〈c 2〉 (equation 2)
3
for the pressure p of an ideal gas, where ρ is the density of the gas and 〈c 2〉 is the mean‑square
speed of the molecules.
Explain how each of the following terms in equation 2 is derived from equation 1:
ρ : ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
1 : ..............................................................................................................................................
3
...................................................................................................................................................
〈c 2〉: ...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) An ideal gas has volume, pressure and temperature as shown in Fig. 2.1.
volume 6.0 × 10–3 m3

pressure 3.0 × 105 Pa
temperature 17 °C
Fig. 2.1
The mass of the gas is 20.7 g.
Calculate the mass of one molecule of the gas.
mass = ...................................................... g [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/M/J/20
7
3 By reference to the first law of thermodynamics, state and explain the change, if any, in the internal
energy of:
(a) a lump of solid lead as it melts at constant temperature
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) some gas in a toy balloon when the balloon bursts and no thermal energy enters or leaves
the gas.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]

8
4 A dish is made from a section of a hollow glass sphere.
The dish, fixed to a horizontal table, contains a small solid ball of mass 45 g, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
ball surface
mass 45 g of dish
x
Fig. 4.1
The horizontal displacement of the ball from the centre C of the dish is x.
Initially, the ball is held at rest with distance x = 3.0 cm.
The ball is then released. The variation with time t of the horizontal displacement x of the ball from
point C is shown in Fig. 4.2.
3
x / cm
2
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
t/s
–1
–2
–3
–4
Fig. 4.2
The motion of the ball in the dish is simple harmonic with its acceleration a given by the expression
a=– (Rg ) x
where g is the acceleration of free fall and R is a constant that depends on the dimensions of the
dish and the ball.
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/M/J/20

9
(a) Use Fig. 4.2 to show that the angular frequency ω of oscillation of the ball in the dish is
2.9 rad s–1.
[1]
(b) Use the information in (a) to:
(i) determine R
R = ..................................................... m [2]
(ii) calculate the speed of the ball as it passes over the centre C of the dish.
speed = ................................................ m s–1 [2]
(c) Some moisture collects on the surface of the dish so that the motion of the ball becomes
lightly damped.
On the axes of Fig. 4.2, draw a line to show the lightly damped motion of the ball for the first
5.0 s after the release of the ball. [3]
[Total: 8]

10
5 (a) Explain the principles of the detection of ultrasound waves for medical diagnosis.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) By reference to specific acoustic impedance, explain why there is very little transmission of
ultrasound waves from air into skin.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/M/J/20

11
6 (a) Telephone signals may be transmitted either by means of an optic fibre or by means of a wire
pair.
State three advantages of the use of an optic fibre rather than a wire pair.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) It is proposed to transmit a signal over a distance of 4.5 × 103 km by means of an optic fibre.
The input signal has a power of 9.8 mW.
The minimum signal that can be detected at the output has a power of 6.3 × 10–17 W. For this
signal power, the signal‑to‑noise ratio is 21 dB.
Calculate:
(i) the power of the background noise
power = ..................................................... W [2]
(ii) the maximum attenuation per unit length of the optic fibre that allows for uninterrupted
transmission of the signal.
attenuation per unit length = ........................................... dB km–1 [2]
[Total: 7]
12
7 A metal sphere of radius R is isolated in space.
Point P is a distance x from the centre of the sphere, as illustrated in Fig. 7.1.
R P
Fig. 7.1
The variation with distance x of the electric field strength E due to the charge on the sphere is
shown in Fig. 7.2.
20
15
E / 105 V m–1
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
x / cm
Fig. 7.2
(a) State what is meant by electric field strength.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/M/J/20

13
(b) (i) Use Fig. 7.2 to determine the radius R of the sphere. Explain your working.
R = ................................................... cm [2]
(ii) Use Fig. 7.2 to determine the charge Q on the sphere.
Q = ..................................................... C [3]
(c) An α‑particle is situated a distance 8.0 cm from the centre of the sphere.
Calculate the acceleration of the α‑particle.
acceleration = ................................................ m s–2 [3]
[Total: 10]

14
8 (a) An ideal operational amplifier (op‑amp) is connected to a load resistor.

The op‑amp is assumed to have infinite bandwidth and zero output resistance.
State:
(i) what is meant by infinite bandwidth
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the effect, if any, on the output voltage of increasing the load resistance.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A student designs the circuit shown in Fig. 8.1 in order to indicate changes in temperature of
the thermistor T.
100 kΩ T
110 Ω
150 kΩ +
Q P
1.5 V –
+
–
40 Ω
V
Fig. 8.1
(i) Explain why point P is known as a virtual earth.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/M/J/20

15
(ii) Calculate the potential at point Q.
potential = ...................................................... V [2]
(iii) At a temperature of 13 °C, the resistance of the thermistor T is 230 kΩ.
Show that the potential difference measured with the voltmeter is 0.88 V.
[2]
(c) The resistance of the thermistor T in (b) decreases as its temperature rises.
Explain the effect of this change in temperature on the potential difference measured with the
voltmeter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]

16
9 (a) An electron is travelling at speed v in a straight line in a vacuum. It enters a uniform magnetic
field of flux density 8.0 × 10–4 T. Initially, the electron is travelling at right angles to the magnetic
field, as illustrated in Fig. 9.1.
region of uniform
magnetic field
path of
electron
Fig. 9.1
The path of the electron in the magnetic field is an arc of a circle of radius 6.4 cm.
(i) State and explain the direction of the magnetic field.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Show that the speed v of the electron is 9.0 × 106 m s–1.
[3]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/M/J/20

17
(b) A uniform electric field is now applied in the same region as the magnetic field.
The electron passes undeviated through the region of the two fields, as illustrated in Fig. 9.2.
region of
uniform electric
and magnetic fields
path of
electron
Fig. 9.2
(i) On Fig. 9.2, mark with an arrow the direction of the uniform electric field. [1]
(ii) Use data from (a) to calculate the magnitude of the electric field strength.
field strength = ............................................... N C–1 [2]
(c) The electron in (b) is now replaced by an α‑particle travelling at the same speed v along the
same initial path as the electron.
Describe and explain the shape of the path in the region of the magnetic and electric fields.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]

18
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A simple iron‑cored transformer is illustrated in Fig. 10.1.
laminated
soft-iron core
input output
primary coil
secondary coil
Fig. 10.1
(i) State one function of a transformer.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) A sinusoidal alternating current in the primary coil gives rise to a varying magnetic flux
linking the secondary coil.
Use Faraday’s law to explain why the output from the transformer is an electromotive
force (e.m.f.) that is alternating.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) State why the soft‑iron core of the transformer is laminated.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/M/J/20

19
11 (a) The uppermost energy bands in a solid are known as the valence band (VB), the forbidden
band (FB) and the conduction band (CB).
A copper wire is at room temperature.
Use band theory to explain why the resistance of the copper wire increases as its temperature
increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) The structure of a copper crystal is to be examined using electron diffraction.
Electrons, having been accelerated from rest through a potential difference V, are incident on
the crystal.
The de Broglie wavelength λ of the electrons is 2.6 × 10–11 m.
Calculate the accelerating potential difference V.
V = ...................................................... V [4]
[Total: 8]
12 (a) State what is meant by the mass defect of a nucleus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]

20
(b) Some masses are shown in Table 12.1.
Table 12.1
mass / u
proton 11 p 1.007 276
neutron 10 n 1.008 665
helium‑4 (42 He) nucleus 4.001 506
Show that:
(i) the energy equivalence of 1.00 u is 934 MeV
[2]
(ii) the binding energy per nucleon of a helium-4 nucleus is 7.09 MeV.
[2]
(c) Isotopes of hydrogen have binding energies per nucleon of less than 3 MeV.
Suggest why a nucleus of helium‑4 does not spontaneously break down to become nuclei of
hydrogen.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer‑related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/M/J/20

* 4 8 1 6 2 1 9 4 9 6 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
2 hours
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (MS/CT) 197910/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/M/J/21

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± ω (x 02 - x 2)
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 The Earth may be assumed to be an isolated uniform sphere with its mass of 6.0 × 1024 kg
concentrated at its centre.
A satellite of mass 1200 kg is in a circular orbit about the Earth in the Earth’s gravitational field.
The period of the orbit is 94 minutes.
(a) Define gravitational field strength.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Calculate the radius of the orbit of the satellite.
radius = ..................................................... m [3]
(c) Rockets on the satellite are fired so that the satellite enters a different circular orbit that has
a period of 150 minutes. The change in the mass of the satellite may be assumed to be
negligible.
(i) Show that the radius of the new orbit is 9.4 × 106 m.
[2]
(ii) State, with a reason, whether the gravitational potential energy of the satellite increases
or decreases.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/M/J/21

5
(iii) Determine the magnitude of the change in the gravitational potential energy of the
satellite.
change in potential energy = ...................................................... J [3]
[Total: 10]

6
2 An ideal gas is contained in a cylinder by means of a movable frictionless piston, as illustrated in

Fig. 2.1.
cylinder
movement
of piston
piston
gas
molecule
Fig. 2.1
Initially, the gas has a volume of 1.8 × 10−3 m3 at a pressure of 3.3 × 105 Pa and a temperature of
310 K.
(a) Show that the number of gas molecules in the cylinder is 1.4 × 1023.
[2]
(b) Use kinetic theory to explain why, when the piston is moved so that the gas expands, this
causes a decrease in the temperature of the gas.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/M/J/21

7
(c) The gas expands so that its volume increases to 2.4 × 10−3 m3 at a pressure of 2.3 × 105 Pa
and a temperature of 288 K, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
1.8 × 10−3 m3 2.4 × 10−3 m3
3.3 × 105 Pa 2.3 × 105 Pa
310 K 288 K
Fig. 2.2
(i) The average translational kinetic energy EK of a molecule of an ideal gas is given by
3
EK = kT
2
Calculate the increase in internal energy ΔU of the gas during the expansion.
ΔU = ...................................................... J [3]
(ii) The work done by the gas during the expansion is 76 J.
Use your answer in (i) to explain whether thermal energy is transferred to or from the gas
during the expansion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]

8
3 (a) State what is meant by simple harmonic motion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A trolley of mass m is held on a horizontal surface by means of two springs. One spring is
attached to a fixed point P. The other spring is connected to an oscillator, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
spring trolley spring oscillator
Fig. 3.1
The springs, each having spring constant k of 130 N m−1, are always extended.
The oscillator is switched off. The trolley is displaced along the line of the springs and then
released. The resulting oscillations of the trolley are simple harmonic.
The acceleration a of the trolley is given by the expression
a=−
⎛2k ⎞ x
⎝m ⎠
where x is the displacement of the trolley from its equilibrium position.
The mass of the trolley is 840 g.
Calculate the frequency f of oscillation of the trolley.
f = .................................................... Hz [3]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/M/J/21

9
(c) The oscillator in (b) is switched on. The frequency of oscillation of the oscillator is varied,
keeping its amplitude of oscillation constant.
The amplitude of oscillation of the trolley is seen to vary. The amplitude is a maximum at the
frequency calculated in (b).
(i) State the name of the effect giving rise to this maximum.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) At any given frequency, the amplitude of oscillation of the trolley is constant.
Explain how this indicates that there are resistive forces opposing the motion of the
trolley.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

10
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/M/J/21

11
4 Outline the use of ultrasound to obtain diagnostic information about internal body structures.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [5]

12
5 (a) State what is meant by the amplitude modulation (AM) of a radio wave.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A radio wave is modulated by an audio signal.
The variation with frequency f of the amplitude of the modulated wave is shown in Fig. 5.1.
amplitude
0
292 300 308
f / kHz
Fig. 5.1
Determine:
(i) the wavelength of the carrier wave
wavelength = ..................................................... m [1]
(ii) the bandwidth of the modulated wave
bandwidth = .................................................. kHz [1]
(iii) the maximum frequency of the audio signal.
maximum frequency = .................................................. kHz [1]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/M/J/21

13
(c) The power of a radio signal at a transmitter is PT.

At a receiver, the received power PR is given by the expression
0.082 PT
PR =
x2
where x is the distance, in metres, between the transmitter and the receiver.
For the transmission of this signal, the attenuation is 73 dB.
Determine the distance x.
x = ..................................................... m [3]
[Total: 8]

14
6 (a) An isolated metal sphere of radius r is charged so that the electric field strength at its surface
is E0.
On Fig. 6.1, sketch the variation of the electric field strength E with distance x from the centre
of the sphere. Your sketch should extend from x = 0 to x = 3r.
E0
field
strength E
0
0 r 2r 3r
distance x
Fig. 6.1
[3]
(b) The de Broglie wavelength of a particle is λ 0 when its momentum is p0.
On Fig. 6.2, sketch the variation with momentum p of the de Broglie wavelength λ of the
p
particle for values of momentum from 0 to p0.
2
2λ 0
wavelength λ
λ0
0
0 p0 p0
2
momentum p
Fig. 6.2
[2]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/M/J/21
15
(c) A radioactive isotope decays with a half-life of 15 s to form a stable product.
A fresh sample of the radioactive isotope at time t = 0 contains N0 nuclei and no nuclei of the
stable product.
On Fig. 6.3, sketch the variation with t of the number n of nuclei of the stable product for time
t = 0 to time t = 45 s.
N0
number n
0.5 N0
0
0 15 30 45
time t / s
Fig. 6.3
[3]
[Total: 8]

16
7 (a) State what is meant by the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A capacitor of capacitance C is connected into the circuit shown in Fig. 7.1.
A B
sensitive
+ ammeter
V A
–
C
Fig. 7.1
When the two-way switch is in position A, the capacitor is charged so that the potential
difference across it is V.
The switch moves to position B and the capacitor fully discharges through the sensitive
ammeter.
The switch moves repeatedly between A and B so that the capacitor charges and then
discharges with frequency f.
(i) Show that the average current I in the ammeter is given by the expression
I = fCV.
[2]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/M/J/21

17
(ii) For a potential difference V of 150 V and a frequency f of 60 Hz, the average current in
the ammeter is 4.8 μA.
Calculate the capacitance, in pF, of the capacitor.
capacitance = .................................................... pF [2]
(c) A second capacitor, having the same capacitance as the capacitor in (b), is connected into
the circuit of Fig. 7.1. The two capacitors are connected in series.
State and explain the new reading on the ammeter.
new reading = ......................................................... μA
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]

18
8 The variation with temperature of the resistance of a thermistor is shown in Fig. 8.1.
4.0
3.0
resistance / kΩ
2.0
1.0
0
0 10 20 30
temperature / °C
Fig. 8.1
A student includes the thermistor and an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) in the circuit of
Fig. 8.2.
+3.0 V
2.5 kΩ
+
–
+
–
3.0 kΩ 5.0 kΩ
Fig. 8.2
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/M/J/21

19
(a) Calculate the potential V + at the non-inverting input of the op-amp.
V + = ...................................................... V [2]
(b) At 10 °C, the resistance of the thermistor is 2.5 kΩ.
State and explain whether the light-emitting diode (LED) is emitting light.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Explain why the student’s circuit will not indicate any change in temperature above 0 °C.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) The resistor of resistance 5.0 kΩ is changed to a resistor of resistance R so that the LED
switches on or off at a temperature of 20 °C.
Determine R in kΩ.
R = .................................................... kΩ [3]
[Total: 9]

20
9 (a) State what is meant by a magnetic field.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A rectangular piece of aluminium foil is situated in a uniform magnetic field of flux density B,
magnetic field,
flux density B
Q R
T
aluminium
movement foil
of electrons
P S
V W
Fig. 9.1
The magnetic field is normal to the face PQRS of the foil.
Electrons, each of charge −q, enter the foil at right angles to the face PQTV.
(i) On Fig. 9.1, shade the face of the foil on which electrons initially accumulate. [1]
(ii) Explain why electrons do not continuously accumulate on the face you have shaded.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/M/J/21

21
(c) The Hall voltage VH developed across the foil in (b) is given by the expression
BI
VH =
ntq
where I is the current in the foil.
(i) State the meaning of the quantity n.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Using the letters on Fig. 9.1, identify the distance t.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Suggest why, in practice, Hall probes are usually made using a semiconductor material rather
than a metal.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]

22
10 (a) State Lenz’s law.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A metal ring is suspended from a fixed point P by means of a thread, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
P P
metal
magnet
ring
metal pole piece
ring
N S
Fig. 10.1 Fig. 10.2
The ring is displaced a distance d and then released. The ring completes many oscillations
before coming to rest.
The poles of a magnet are now placed near to the ring so that the ring hangs midway between
the poles of the magnet, as shown in Fig. 10.2.
The ring is again displaced a distance d and then released.

Explain why the ring completes fewer oscillations before coming to rest.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/M/J/21

23
(c) The ring in (b) is now cut so that it has the shape shown in Fig. 10.3.
Fig. 10.3
Explain why, when the procedure in (b) is repeated, the cut ring completes more oscillations
than the complete ring when oscillating between the poles of the magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]

24
11 (a) State how, in a modern X-ray tube, the intensity of the X-ray beam and its hardness are
controlled.
intensity: ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
hardness: ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A model of a limb consists of soft tissue and bone, as illustrated in Fig. 11.1.
3.0 cm
I0 IC
intensity intensity
I0 IS
bone soft
tissue
9.0 cm
Fig. 11.1
The soft tissue has a thickness of 9.0 cm. The bone within the soft tissue has a thickness of
3.0 cm.
Data for the linear attenuation (absorption) coefficient μ of X-rays in soft tissue and in bone
are shown in Table 11.1.
Table 11.1
μ / cm−1
soft tissue 0.92
bone 2.90
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/M/J/21

25
A parallel beam of X-rays of intensity I0 is incident normally on the model.
Calculate, in terms of I0:
(i) the transmitted intensity IS through soft tissue alone
IS = ..................................................... I0 [2]
(ii) the transmitted intensity IC through soft tissue and bone.
IC = ..................................................... I0 [2]
(c) By reference to your answers in (b), suggest, with a reason, whether good contrast on an
X-ray image would be obtained.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

26
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/M/J/21

27
12 (a) Electromagnetic radiation of a single constant frequency is incident on a metal surface. This
causes an electron to be emitted.
Explain why the maximum kinetic energy of the electron is independent of the intensity of the
incident radiation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Ultraviolet radiation of wavelength 250 nm is incident on the surface of a sheet of zinc.
The maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electrons is 1.4 eV.
Determine, in eV:
(i) the energy of a photon of the ultraviolet radiation
energy = .................................................... eV [3]
(ii) the work function energy of the surface of the zinc.
energy = .................................................... eV [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/M/J/21

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/M/J/21

* 9 0 6 3 6 6 6 0 8 5 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (MS/JG) 197911/5
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/M/J/21

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± ω (x 02 - x 2)
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/M/J/21

5
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) An isolated planet is a uniform sphere of radius 3.39 × 106 m. Its mass of 6.42 × 1023 kg may
be considered to be a point mass concentrated at its centre. The planet rotates about its axis
with a period of 24.6 hours.
For an object resting on the surface of the planet at the equator, calculate, to three significant
figures:
(i) the gravitational field strength
field strength = .............................................. N kg−1 [2]
(ii) the centripetal acceleration
acceleration = ................................................ m s−2 [2]
(iii) the force per unit mass exerted on the object by the surface of the planet.
force per unit mass = .............................................. N kg−1 [1]
[Total: 6]
6
2 An ideal gas has a volume of 3.1 × 10−3 m3 at a pressure of 8.5 × 105 Pa and a temperature of
290 K, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
volume 3.1 × 10−3 m3 volume 6.3 × 10−3 m3
pressure 8.5 × 105 Pa pressure 2.7 × 105 Pa
temperature 290 K temperature TF
Fig. 2.1
The gas suddenly expands to a volume of 6.3 × 10−3 m3. During the expansion, no thermal energy
is transferred. The final pressure of the gas is 2.7 × 105 Pa at temperature TF, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
(a) Show that the number of gas molecules is 6.6 × 1023.
[3]
(b) (i) Show that the final temperature TF of the gas is 190 K.
[1]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/M/J/21

7
(ii) The average translational kinetic energy EK of a molecule of an ideal gas is given by
3
EK = kT
2
where T is the thermodynamic temperature and k is the Boltzmann constant.
Calculate the increase in internal energy ΔU of the gas.
ΔU = ...................................................... J [3]
(c) Use the first law of thermodynamics to explain why the external work w done on the gas
during the expansion is equal to the increase in internal energy in (b)(ii).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

8
3 A U-shaped tube contains some liquid. The liquid column in each half of the tube has length L, as
shown in Fig. 3.1.
x
x
L L
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2
The liquid columns are displaced vertically. The liquid then oscillates in the tube. The liquid levels
are displaced from the equilibrium positions as shown in Fig. 3.2.
The acceleration a of the liquid in the tube is related to the displacement x by the expression
a = − ⎛ g ⎞x
⎝L⎠
(a) Explain how the expression shows that the liquid in the tube is undergoing simple harmonic
motion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The length L of each liquid column is 18 cm.
Determine the period T of the oscillations.
T = ...................................................... s [3]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/M/J/21
9
(c) The oscillations of the liquid in the tube are damped.

In any one complete cycle of the oscillations, the amplitude decreases by 6.0% of its value at
the beginning of the oscillation.
Determine the ratio
energy of oscillations after 3 cycles .

initial energy of oscillations
ratio = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]

10
4 (a) A sinusoidal carrier wave has a constant amplitude and a frequency of 1.2 MHz. The carrier
wave is modulated by a signal wave such that a 1.0 V displacement of the signal wave causes
a change in frequency of 25 kHz.
The signal wave has frequency 8.0 kHz and amplitude 2.0 V.
(i) State the name of this type of modulation of the carrier wave.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) For this modulated carrier wave, determine the variation, if any, in:
1. its amplitude
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. its frequency.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/M/J/21

11
(b) An audio signal is transmitted by means of a modulated radio wave.
The variation with frequency of the amplitude of the radio wave is shown in Fig. 4.1.
amplitude
0
225 240 255
frequency / kHz
Fig. 4.1
For this transmission, determine:
(i) the wavelength, in km, of the carrier wave
wavelength = ................................................... km [2]
(ii) the bandwidth
bandwidth = .................................................. kHz [1]
(iii) the frequency of the audio signal.
frequency = .................................................. kHz [1]
[Total: 8]

12
5 (a) An isolated metal sphere of radius r is charged so that the electric potential at its surface is
V0.
On Fig. 5.1, sketch the variation with distance x from the centre of the sphere of the electric
potential. Your graph should extend from x = 0 to x = 3r.
1.0 V0
electric
potential
0.5 V0
0
0 r 2r 3r
x
Fig. 5.1
[3]
(b) Photons having wavelength λ are incident on a metal surface.

The maximum wavelength for which there is emission of electrons is λ 0.
λ
For photons of wavelength 0 , the maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electrons is EMAX.
2
On Fig. 5.2, sketch the variation with wavelength λ of the maximum kinetic energy for values
λ
of wavelength between λ = 0 and λ = λ 0.
3
3 EMAX
energy
2 EMAX
EMAX
0
0 λ0 λ0 λ0
3 2 λ
Fig. 5.2
[3]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/M/J/21

13
(c) A pure sample of a radioactive isotope contains N0 nuclei. The half-life of the isotope is T . 1
2
The product of the radioactive decay is stable.
The variation with time t of the number N of nuclei of the radioactive isotope is shown in
Fig. 5.3.
N0
number
N0
2
0
0 T
time t
Fig. 5.3
On Fig. 5.3:
● label, on the time axis, the time t = 1.0T and the time t = 2.0T
1
2
1
2
● sketch the variation with time t of the number of nuclei of the decay product for time t = 0
to time t = T.
[3]
[Total: 9]

14
6 (a) Two flat metal plates are held a small distance apart by means of insulating pads, as shown
in Fig. 6.1.
metal plate
insulating
metal plate pad
Fig. 6.1
Explain how the plates could act as a capacitor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The arrangement in Fig. 6.1 has capacitance C.

The arrangement is connected into the circuit of Fig. 6.2.
A B
sensitive
ammeter
V A
C
Fig. 6.2
When the two-way switch is moved to position A, the capacitor is charged so that the potential
difference across it is V. When the switch moves to position B, the capacitor fully discharges
through the sensitive ammeter.
The switch moves repeatedly between A and B so that the capacitor charges and then
discharges with frequency f.
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/M/J/21

15
(i) Show that the average current I in the ammeter is given by
I = CVf.
[2]
(ii) For a potential difference V of 180 V and a frequency f of switching of 50 Hz, the average
current I in the ammeter is 2.5 μA.
Calculate the capacitance, in pF, of the parallel plates.
capacitance = .................................................... pF [2]
(c) A second capacitor is connected into the circuit of Fig. 6.2.

The two capacitors are connected in parallel.
State and explain the change, if any, in the average current in the ammeter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]

16
7 (a) Two properties of an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) are infinite input impedance and
infinite bandwidth.
(i) infinite input impedance
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) infinite bandwidth.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A student uses a negative temperature coefficient thermistor in the circuit of Fig. 7.1 to
indicate changes in temperature.
100 kΩ
1100 Ω
+5.0 V
96 kΩ
1.5 V X
–
400 Ω –5.0 V V
Fig. 7.1
(i) Show that the potential at point X is 0.40 V.
[1]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/M/J/21

17
(ii) The thermistor has a resistance of 360 kΩ at a particular temperature.
For this temperature of the thermistor, calculate the magnitude of the reading on the
voltmeter.
voltmeter reading = ...................................................... V [3]
(iii) The temperature of the thermistor increases.
State and explain the effect of this change on the magnitude of the reading on the
voltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Explain why the amplifier circuit will no longer indicate temperature changes when the
magnitude of the gain of the circuit is greater than 12.5.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

18
8 (a) Define magnetic flux density.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Electrons, each of mass m and charge q, are accelerated from rest in a vacuum through a
potential difference V.
Derive an expression, in terms of m, q and V, for the final speed v of the electrons. Explain
your working.
[2]
(c) The accelerated electrons in (b) are injected at point S into a region of uniform magnetic field
of flux density B, as illustrated in Fig. 8.1.
region of uniform
magnetic field,
flux density B
path of electrons,
radius r
Fig. 8.1
The electrons move at right angles to the direction of the magnetic field. The path of the
electrons is a circle of radius r.
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/M/J/21

19
q
(i) Show that the specific charge of the electrons is given by the expression
m
q 2V
m = B 2 r 2.
[2]
(ii) Electrons are accelerated through a potential difference V of 230 V. The electrons are
injected normally into the magnetic field of flux density 0.38 mT.
The radius r of the circular orbit of the electrons is 14 cm.
Use this information to calculate a value for the specific charge of an electron.
specific charge = .............................................. C kg−1 [2]
(iii) Suggest why the arrangement outlined in (ii), using the same values of B and V, is not
practical for the determination of the specific charge of α-particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]

20
9 (a) State two situations in which a charged particle in a magnetic field does not experience a
force.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A loosely coiled metal spring is suspended from a fixed point, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
fixed
point
spring
small
mass
flexible
lead
Fig. 9.1
Electrical connections are made to the ends of the spring by means of a flexible lead.
The length of the spring is measured before the switch is closed and then again after the
switch is closed.
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/M/J/21

21
When the switch is closed, a magnetic field is set up around each coil of the spring.
By reference to these magnetic fields, explain why there is a change in length of the spring.
State whether the spring extends or contracts.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) With the switch in (b) closed, the small mass on the free end of the spring is now made to
oscillate vertically.
Use the principles of electromagnetic induction to explain why small fluctuations in the current
in the spring are found to occur.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]

22
10 (a) By reference to heating effect, explain what is meant by the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) value
of an alternating current.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The variations with time t of two currents I1 and I2 are shown in Fig. 10.1 and Fig. 10.2.
3
I1 / A
2
0
0 t
–1
–2
–3
Fig. 10.1
3
I2 / A
2
0
0 t
–1
–2
–3
Fig. 10.2
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/M/J/21

23
(i) Use Fig. 10.1 to determine the peak value and the r.m.s. value of the current I1.
peak value = ............................................................ A
r.m.s. value = ............................................................ A

[1]
(ii) Use Fig. 10.2 to determine the peak value and the r.m.s. value of the current I2.
peak value = ............................................................ A
r.m.s. value = ............................................................ A

[1]
(c) The variation with time t of the supply voltage V to a house is given by the expression
V = 240 sin kt
where V is in volts, t is in seconds and k is a constant with unit rad s−1.
(i) The frequency of the supply voltage is 50 Hz.
Determine k to two significant figures.
k = ............................................. rad s−1 [2]
(ii) The supply voltage is applied to a heater. The mean power of the heater is 3.2 kW.
Calculate the resistance of the heater.
resistance = ..................................................... Ω [2]
[Total: 8]
24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/M/J/21

25
11 (a) State the purpose of computed tomography (CT scanning).
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Outline the principles of CT scanning.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 6]

26
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A stationary nucleus of samarium-157 ( 157

62 Sm) emits a gamma-ray (γ-ray) photon of energy
0.57 MeV.
Determine, for one γ-ray photon:
(i) its wavelength
wavelength = ..................................................... m [2]
(ii) its momentum.
momentum = ................................................... N s [2]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/M/J/21

27
(c) (i) Using your answer to (b)(ii), determine the speed of the samarium-157 nucleus after
emission of the photon.
speed = ................................................ m s−1 [2]
(ii) By reference to your answer in (c)(i), explain quantitatively why the speed of the
samarium-157 nucleus may be assumed to be negligible compared with the speed of the
photon.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/M/J/21

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/M/J/21

* 2 1 3 0 6 2 9 3 2 9 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
Paper 4 A Level Structured Questions October/November 2016
2 hours

DC (NF/CGW) 116306/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/O/N/16

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
3 V

v =±ω√ (x02 – x 2)

fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/O/N/16 [Turn over

4
1 A satellite is in a circular orbit of radius r about the Earth of mass M, as illustrated in Fig. 1.1.
Earth satellite
mass M
Fig. 1.1
The mass of the Earth may be assumed to be concentrated at its centre.
(a) Show that the period T of the orbit of the satellite is given by the expression
4π2r 3
T2 =
GM
where G is the gravitational constant. Explain your working.
[3]
(b) (i) A satellite in geostationary orbit appears to remain above the same point on the Earth
and has a period of 24 hours.
State two other features of a geostationary orbit.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/O/N/16

5
(ii) The mass M of the Earth is 6.0 × 1024 kg.

Use the expression in (a) to determine the radius of a geostationary orbit.
radius = .................................................... m [2]
(c) A global positioning system (GPS) satellite orbits the Earth at a height of 2.0 × 104 km above
the Earth’s surface.
The radius of the Earth is 6.4 × 103 km.
Use your answer in (b)(ii) and the expression
T 2 ∝ r3
to calculate, in hours, the period of the orbit of this satellite.
period = .............................................. hours [2]
[Total: 9]

6
2 An ideal gas initially has pressure 1.0 × 105 Pa, volume 4.0 × 10−4 m3 and temperature 300 K, as
initial state final state
1.0 × 105 Pa 5.0 × 105 Pa

4.0 × 10–4 m3 4.0 × 10–4 m3
300 K T
Fig. 2.1
A change in energy of the gas of 240 J results in an increase of pressure to a final value of
5.0 × 105 Pa at constant volume.
The thermodynamic temperature becomes T.
(a) Calculate
(i) the temperature T,
T = ..................................................... K [2]
(ii) the amount of gas.
amount = .................................................. mol [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/O/N/16

7
(b) The increase in internal energy ΔU of a system may be represented by the expression
ΔU = q + w.
(i) State what is meant by the symbol
1. +q,
...........................................................................................................................................
2. +w.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State, for the gas in (a), the value of
1. ΔU,
ΔU = ............................................................ J
2. +q,
+q = ............................................................ J
3. +w.
+w = ............................................................ J
[3]
[Total: 9]

8
3 To demonstrate simple harmonic motion, a student attaches a trolley to two similar stretched
springs, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
spring trolley
Fig. 3.1
The trolley has mass m of 810 g.
The trolley is displaced along the line of the two springs and then released. The subsequent
acceleration a of the trolley is given by the expression
2k x
a = −
m
where the spring constant k for each of the springs is 64 N m−1 and x is the displacement of the
trolley.
(a) Show that the frequency of oscillation of the trolley is 2.0 Hz.
[3]
(b) The maximum displacement of the trolley is 1.6 cm.

Calculate the maximum speed of the trolley.
speed = ............................................... m s−1 [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/O/N/16

9
(c) The mass of the trolley is increased. The initial displacement of the trolley remains unchanged.
Suggest the change, if any, that occurs in the frequency and in the maximum speed of the
oscillations of the trolley.
frequency: .................................................................................................................................
maximum speed: ......................................................................................................................

[2]
[Total: 7]

10
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/O/N/16

11
4 (a) Signals may be transmitted in either analogue or digital form. One advantage of digital
transmission is that the signal can be regenerated.
Explain
(i) what is meant by regeneration,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) why an analogue signal cannot be regenerated.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Digital signals are transmitted along an optic fibre using infra-red radiation. The uninterrupted
length of the optic fibre is 58 km.
The effective noise level in the receiver at the end of the optic fibre is 0.38 μW.
The minimum acceptable signal-to-noise ratio in the receiver is 32 dB.
(i) Calculate the minimum acceptable power PMIN of the signal at the receiver.
PMIN = .................................................... W [2]
(ii) The input signal power to the optic fibre is 9.5 mW. The output power is PMIN.
Calculate the attenuation per unit length of the optic fibre.
attenuation per unit length = ........................................... dB km−1 [2]
[Total: 8]
12
5 Two small solid metal spheres A and B have equal radii and are in a vacuum. Their centres are
15 cm apart.
Sphere A has charge +3.0 pC and sphere B has charge +12 pC. The arrangement is illustrated in
Fig. 5.1.
sphere A P sphere B
charge + 3.0 pC charge + 12 pC
5.0 cm
15 cm
Fig. 5.1
Point P lies on the line joining the centres of the spheres and is a distance of 5.0 cm from the
centre of sphere A.
(a) Suggest why the electric field strength in both spheres is zero.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Show that the electric field strength is zero at point P. Explain your working.
[3]
(c) Calculate the electric potential at point P.
electric potential = ..................................................... V [2]

© UCLES 2016 9702/41/O/N/16
13
(d) A silver-107 nucleus ( 107

47 Ag) has speed v when it is a long distance from point P.
Use your answer in (c) to calculate the minimum value of speed v such that the nucleus can
reach point P.
speed = ............................................... m s−1 [3]
[Total: 10]

14
6 (a) The slew rate of an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is said to be infinite.
Explain what is meant by infinite slew rate.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The circuit of Fig. 6.1 is designed to indicate whether the temperature of the thermistor is
above or below 24 °C.
2.00 kΩ +5 V
–
4.5 V
+ VOUT
R 3.00 kΩ –5 V
Fig. 6.1
The operational amplifier (op-amp) is assumed to be ideal.
At 24 °C, the resistance of the thermistor is 1.50 kΩ.
(i) Determine the resistance of resistor R such that the output VOUT of the op-amp changes
at 24 °C.
resistance = ..................................................... Ω [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/O/N/16

15
(ii) On Fig. 6.1,
1. draw two light-emitting diodes (LEDs) connected so as to indicate whether the

output VOUT of the op-amp is either +5 V or −5 V, [2]
2. label with the letter G the LED that will be emitting light when the temperature is
below 24 °C. Explain your working.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]

16
7 (a) Explain what is meant by a field of force.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State the type of field, or fields, that will give rise to a force acting on
(i) a moving uncharged particle,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) a stationary charged particle,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) a charged particle moving at an angle to the field or fields.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) An electron, mass m and charge −q, is moving at speed v in a vacuum. It enters a region of
uniform magnetic field of flux density B, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
uniform magnetic field

flux density B
path of electron
mass m, charge –q
Fig. 7.1
Initially, the electron is moving at right-angles to the direction of the magnetic field.
(i) Explain why the path of the electron in the magnetic field is the arc of a circle.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/O/N/16

17
(ii) Derive an expression, in terms of the radius r of the path, for the linear momentum of the
electron. Show your working.
[2]
[Total: 9]
8 Explain the main principles behind the use of nuclear magnetic resonance imaging (NMRI) to
obtain diagnostic information about internal body structures.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [8]
[Total: 8]

18
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The diameter of the cross-section of a long solenoid is 3.2 cm, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
coil C
long solenoid 85 turns
3.2 cm
I I
Fig. 9.1
A coil C, with 85 turns of wire, is wound tightly around the centre region of the solenoid.
The magnetic flux density B, in tesla, at the centre of the solenoid is given by the expression
B = π × 10−3 × I
where I is the current in the solenoid in ampere.
Show that, for a current I of 2.8 A in the solenoid, the magnetic flux linkage of the coil C is
6.0 × 10−4 Wb.
[1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/O/N/16

19
(c) The current I in the solenoid in (b) is reversed in 0.30 s.
Calculate the mean e.m.f. induced in coil C.
e.m.f. = .................................................. mV [2]
(d) The current I in the solenoid in (b) is now varied with time t as shown in Fig. 9.2.
3.0
2.0
I/ A
1.0
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
t/s
–1.0
–2.0
–3.0
Fig. 9.2
Use your answer to (c) to show, on Fig. 9.3, the variation with time t of the e.m.f. E induced in
coil C.
E / mV
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
t/s
Fig. 9.3
[4]
[Total: 9]
20
10 (a) Explain what is meant by the photoelectric effect.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) One wavelength of electromagnetic radiation emitted from a mercury vapour lamp is 436 nm.
Calculate the photon energy corresponding to this wavelength.
energy = ...................................................... J [2]
(c) Light from the lamp in (b) is incident, separately, on the surfaces of caesium and tungsten
metal.
Data for the work function energies of caesium and tungsten metal are given in Fig. 10.1.
metal work function

energy / eV
caesium 1.4
tungsten 4.5
Fig. 10.1
Calculate the threshold wavelength for photoelectric emission from
(i) caesium,
threshold wavelength = .................................................. nm [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/O/N/16

21
(ii) tungsten.
threshold wavelength = .................................................. nm [1]
(d) Use your answers in (c) to state and explain whether the radiation from the mercury lamp of
wavelength 436 nm will give rise to photoelectric emission from each of the metals.
caesium: ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
tungsten: ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]

22
11 Some of the electron energy bands in a solid are illustrated in Fig. 11.1.
conduction band
(partially filled)
forbidden band
valence band
Fig. 11.1
The width of the forbidden band and the number of charge carriers occupying each band depends
on the nature of the solid.
Use band theory to explain why the resistance of a sample of a metal at room temperature
changes with increasing temperature.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [5]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/O/N/16

23
12 Radon-222 (222
86 Rn) is a radioactive element found in atmospheric air.
The decay constant of radon-222 is 2.1 × 10−6 s−1.
(a) (i) Define radioactive half-life.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Show that the half-life t is related to the decay constant λ by the expression
1
2
λ t = 0.693.
1
2
[2]
(b) Radon-222 is considered to be an unacceptable health hazard when the activity of radon-222
is greater than 200 Bq in 1.0 m3 of air.
Calculate the minimum mass of radon-222 in 1.0 m3 of air above which the health hazard
becomes unacceptable.
mass = .................................................... kg [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/O/N/16

24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/O/N/16

* 7 3 1 4 7 0 8 5 3 9 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours

This document consists of 24 printed pages.
DC (RW/JG) 116303/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/O/N/16

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
pressure of an ideal gas p= 〈c 〉
3 V

v =±ω√ (x02 – x 2)

fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
electric potential V=
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ=
t 1
2

4
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The nearest star to the Sun is Proxima Centauri.

This star has a mass of 2.5 × 1029 kg and is a distance of 4.0 × 1013 km from the Sun.
The Sun has a mass of 2.0 × 1030 kg.
(i) State why Proxima Centauri may be assumed to be a point mass when viewed from the
Sun.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate
1. the gravitational field strength due to Proxima Centauri at a distance of 4.0 × 1013 km,
field strength = ............................................... N kg–1 [2]
2. the gravitational force of attraction between the Sun and Proxima Centauri.
force = ...................................................... N [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/O/N/16

5
(c) Suggest quantitatively why it may be assumed that the Sun is isolated in space from other
stars.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

6
2 (a) The equation of state for an ideal gas of volume V at pressure p is
pV = nRT
where R is the molar gas constant.
State what is meant by
(i) the symbol n,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the symbol T.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) An ideal gas is held in a container of volume 2.4 × 103 cm3 at pressure 4.9 × 105 Pa.
The temperature of the gas is 100 °C.
Show that the number of molecules of the gas in the container is 2.3 × 1023.
[3]
(c) Use data from (b) to estimate the mean distance between molecules in the gas.
mean distance = .................................................... cm [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/O/N/16
7
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain, by reference to work done and heating, whether the internal energy of the following
increases, decreases or remains constant:
(i) the gas in a toy balloon when the balloon bursts suddenly,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) ice melting at constant temperature and at atmospheric pressure to form water that is
more dense than the ice.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 8]

8
4 A mass hangs vertically from a fixed point by means of a spring, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
spring
l
mass
Fig. 4.1
The mass is displaced vertically and then released. The subsequent oscillations of the mass are
simple harmonic.
The variation with time t of the length l of the spring is shown in Fig. 4.2.
18
17
16
l / cm
15
14
13
12
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
t /s
Fig. 4.2
(a) Use Fig. 4.2 to
(i) state two values of t at which the mass is moving downwards with maximum speed,
t = ................................. s and t = ................................. s [1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/O/N/16

9
(ii) determine, for these oscillations, the angular frequency ω,
ω = .............................................. rad s–1 [2]
(iii) show that the maximum speed of the mass is 0.42 m s–1.
[2]
(b) Use data from Fig. 4.2 and (a)(iii) to sketch, on the axes of Fig. 4.3, the variation with
displacement x from the equilibrium position of the velocity v of the mass.
0.5
0.4
v / m s–1
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
–4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4
–0.1 x / cm
–0.2
–0.3
–0.4
–0.5
Fig. 4.3 [3]
[Total: 8]
10
5 Ultrasound may be used to obtain information about internal body structures.
(a) Suggest why the ultrasound from the transducer is pulsed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) (i) State what is meant by specific acoustic impedance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) A parallel beam of ultrasound of intensity I0 is incident normally on the boundary between
two media, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
specific acoustic specific acoustic

impedance Z1 impedance Z2
incident beam transmitted beam

Fig. 5.1
The media have specific acoustic impedances Z1 and Z2.

The intensity of the ultrasound beam transmitted across the boundary is IT.
Explain the significance of the magnitudes of Z1 and of Z2 on the ratio IT / I0.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/O/N/16

11
6 Two solid metal spheres A and B, each of radius 1.5 cm, are situated in a vacuum. Their centres
are separated by a distance of 20.0 cm, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
1.5 cm 1.5 cm
20.0 cm
sphere A sphere B
Both spheres are positively charged.
Point P lies on the line joining the centres of the two spheres, at a distance x from the centre of
sphere A.
50
40
30
E / N C–1
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
–10 x / cm
–20
–30
–40
–50
Fig. 6.2

12
(a) Use Fig. 6.2 to determine the ratio

magnitude of charge on sphere A
.
magnitude of charge on sphere B
ratio = ...........................................................[3]
(b) The variation with distance x of the electric potential V at point P is shown in Fig. 6.3.
0.8
0.7
0.6
V/V
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
x / cm
Fig. 6.3
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/O/N/16

13
An α-particle is initially at rest on the surface of sphere A.

The α-particle moves along the line joining the centres of the two spheres.
Determine, for the α-particle as it moves between the two spheres,
(i) its maximum speed,
maximum speed = ................................................. m s–1 [3]
(ii) its speed on reaching the surface of sphere B.
speed = ................................................. m s–1 [2]
[Total: 8]

14
7 (a) (i) Define capacitance.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Use the expression for the electric potential due to a point charge to show that an isolated
metal sphere of diameter 25 cm has a capacitance of 1.4 × 10–11 F.
[2]
(b) Three capacitors of capacitances 2.0 μF, 3.0 μF and 4.0 μF are connected as shown in Fig. 7.1
to a battery of e.m.f. 9.0 V.
4.0 μF
3.0 μF
2.0 μF
9.0 V
Fig. 7.1
Determine
(i) the combined capacitance of the three capacitors,
capacitance = ..................................................... μF [1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/O/N/16

15
(ii) the potential difference across the capacitor of capacitance 3.0 μF,
potential difference = ...................................................... V [2]
(iii) the positive charge stored on the capacitor of capacitance 2.0 μF.
charge = .................................................... μC [2]
[Total: 8]

16
8 A circuit incorporating an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is shown in Fig. 8.1.
50 kΩ
RA
+9 V
100 Ω
–
RB
10 kΩ +
VIN
–9 V V
Fig. 8.1
The supply to the op-amp is +9 V / –9 V.

The output of the amplifier is measured using a voltmeter having a range 0 – 5.0 V.
A switch enables the inverting input to the op-amp to be connected to either resistor RA or
resistor RB.
(a) A positive potential +VIN is applied to the input to the circuit.
On Fig. 8.1, mark with the letter P the positive connection of the voltmeter such that the
voltmeter shows a positive reading. [1]
(b) Calculate the potential VIN such that the voltmeter has a full-scale deflection when the
inverting input to the op-amp is connected to
(i) resistor RA of resistance 100 Ω,
VIN = ...................................................... V [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/O/N/16

17
(ii) resistor RB of resistance 10 kΩ.
VIN = ...................................................... V [1]
(c) Suggest a use for this type of circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]

18
9 A stiff wire is held horizontally between the poles of a magnet, as illustrated in Fig. 9.1.
stiff
wire
Fig. 9.1
When a constant current of 6.0 A is passed through the wire, there is an additional downwards
force on the magnet of 0.080 N.
(a) On Fig. 9.1, draw an arrow on the wire to show the direction of the current in the wire.
Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The constant current of 6.0 A is now replaced by a low-frequency sinusoidal current.
The root-mean-square (r.m.s.) value of this current is 2.5 A.
Calculate the difference between the maximum and the minimum forces now acting on the
magnet.
difference = ...................................................... N [4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/O/N/16
19
10 Explain the function of the non-uniform magnetic field that is superimposed on a large uniform
magnetic field in diagnosis using nuclear magnetic resonance imaging (NMRI).
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 4]

20
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) An alternating current is passed through an air-cored solenoid.

An iron core is inserted into the solenoid and then held stationary within the solenoid. The
current in the solenoid is now smaller.
Explain why the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) value of the current in the solenoid is reduced as a
result of inserting the core.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Practical transformers are very efficient. However, there are some power losses.
State two sources of power loss within a transformer.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/O/N/16

21
12 (a) State an effect, one in each case, that provides evidence for
(i) the wave nature of a particle,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the particulate nature of electromagnetic radiation.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Four electron energy levels in an isolated atom are shown in Fig. 12.1.
–0.54 eV
–0.85 eV
energy
–1.51 eV
–3.40 eV
Fig. 12.1
For the emission spectrum associated with these energy levels,
(i) on Fig. 12.1, mark with an arrow the transition that gives rise to the shortest wavelength,
[1]
(ii) show that the wavelength of the transition in (i) is 4.35 × 10–7 m.
[2]

22
(c) (i) State what is meant by the de Broglie wavelength.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the speed of an electron having a de Broglie wavelength equal to the
wavelength in (b)(ii).
speed = ................................................. m s–1 [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/O/N/16

23
13 Outline the principles of computed tomography (CT scanning).
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[6]
[Total: 6]
14 Phosphorus-30 ( 30
15 P) was the first artificial radioactive nuclide to be produced in a laboratory. This
was achieved by bombarding aluminium-27 ( 27 13Al) with α-particles.
A partial nuclear equation to represent this reaction is

27 30
13Al + α → 15 P + Φ
(a) State the full nuclear notation for
(i) the α-particle,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the particle represented by the symbol Φ.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

24
(b) Data for the rest masses of the particles in the reaction are given in Fig. 14.1.
particle mass / u
27
13Al
26.98153
α 4.00260
30
15 P
29.97830
Φ 1.00867
Fig. 14.1
Calculate, for this reaction,
(i) the change in the total rest mass of the particles,
mass change = ....................................................... u [2]
(ii) the energy, in joule, equivalent to the mass change calculated in (i).
energy = ....................................................... J [2]
(c) With reference to your answer in (b)(i), comment on the energy of the α-particle such that the
reaction can take place.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/O/N/16

* 7 7 1 5 0 6 7 9 7 7 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
2 hours

DC (JP) 154384
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/O/N/17

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
3 V

v =±ω√ (x02 – x2)

fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 (a) State
(i) what may be deduced from the difference in the temperatures of two objects,
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the basic principle by which temperature is measured.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) By reference to your answer in (a)(ii), explain why two thermometers may not give the same
temperature reading for an object.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A block of aluminium of mass 670 g is heated at a constant rate of 95 W for 6.0 minutes.
The specific heat capacity of aluminium is 910 J kg−1 K−1.
The initial temperature of the block is 24 °C.
(i) Assuming that no thermal energy is lost to the surroundings, show that the final
temperature of the block is 80 °C.
[3]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/O/N/17

5
(ii) In practice, there are energy losses to the surroundings.

The actual variation with time t of the temperature θ of the block is shown in Fig. 1.1.
100
80
θ / °C
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
t / minutes
Fig. 1.1
1. Use the information in (i) to draw, on Fig. 1.1, a line to represent the temperature of
the block, assuming no energy losses to the surroundings. [1]
2. Using Fig. 1.1, calculate the total energy loss to the surroundings during the heating
process.
energy loss = ...................................................... J [2]
[Total: 10]

6
2 (a) State, by reference to simple harmonic motion, what is meant by angular frequency.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A thin metal strip is clamped at one end so that it is horizontal.

A load of mass M is attached to its free end. The load causes a displacement s of the end of
the strip, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
clamp
metal strip
load
mass M
Fig. 2.1
The load is displaced vertically and then released. The load oscillates.
The variation with the acceleration a of the displacement s of the load is shown in Fig. 2.2.
4.0
s / cm
3.0
2.0
1.0
0
–1.0 –0.8 –0.6 –0.4 –0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
a / m s–2
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/O/N/17

7
(i) Use Fig. 2.2 to determine
1. the displacement of the load before it is made to oscillate,
displacement = ......................................................... cm
2. the amplitude of the oscillations of the load.
amplitude = ......................................................... cm
[2]
(ii) Show that the load is undergoing simple harmonic motion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Calculate the frequency of oscillation of the load.
frequency = ................................................... Hz [3]
[Total: 9]

8
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Explain why, for changes in vertical position of a point mass near the Earth’s surface, the
gravitational field strength may be considered to be constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The orbit of the Earth about the Sun is approximately circular with a radius of 1.5 × 108 km.
The time period of the orbit is 365 days.
Determine a value for the mass M of the Sun. Explain your working.
M = .................................................... kg [5]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/O/N/17

9
4 A coaxial cable is frequently used to connect an aerial to a television receiver. Such a cable is
plastic
insulator
covering
copper
core
copper
braid
Fig. 4.1
(a) Suggest two functions of the copper braid.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Suggest two reasons why a wire pair is not usually used to connect the aerial to the receiver.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The coaxial cable connecting an aerial to a receiver has length 14 m.

The cable has an attenuation per unit length of 190 dB km−1.
Calculate the fractional loss in signal power during transmission of the signal along the cable.
fractional loss = ......................................................... [4]

[Total: 8]
10
5 (a) (i) State Coulomb’s law for the force between two point charges.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Two point charges are situated in a vacuum and separated by a distance R. The force
between the charges is FC.
On Fig. 5.1, sketch a graph to show the variation of the force F between the charges with
separation x for values of x from x = R to x = 4R.
1.0 Fc
0.8 Fc
0.6 Fc
0.4 Fc
0.2 Fc
0
R 2R 3R 4R
x
[3]
Fig. 5.1
(b) Two coils C and D are placed close to one another, as shown in Fig. 5.2.
coil C coil D
I e.m.f. E
V
Fig. 5.2
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/O/N/17

11
The variation with time t of the current I in coil C is shown in Fig. 5.3.
On Fig. 5.4, show the variation with time t of the e.m.f. E induced in coil D for time t = 0 to
time t = t5.
0
0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t
Fig. 5.3
0
0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t
Fig. 5.4
[4]
[Total: 8]

12
6 Two capacitors P and Q, each of capacitance C, are connected in series with a battery of e.m.f.
9.0 V, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
switch S
9.0 V
X Y
P T
R
C C
Fig. 6.1
A switch S is used to connect either a third capacitor T, also of capacitance C, or a resistor R, in

parallel with capacitor P.
(a) Switch S is in position X.
Calculate
(i) the combined capacitance, in terms of C, of the three capacitors,
capacitance = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the potential difference across capacitor Q. Explain your working.
potential difference = ..................................................... V [2]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/O/N/17

13
(b) Switch S is now moved to position Y.

State what happens to the potential difference across capacitor P and across capacitor Q.
capacitor P: ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
capacitor Q: .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 8]

14
7 The circuit of an amplifier incorporating an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is shown in Fig. 7.1.
R2
+9.0 V
R1
P
–
+
V IN
–9.0 V V OUT
Fig. 7.1
(a) By reference to the properties of an ideal op-amp,
(i) explain why point P is referred to as a virtual earth,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) derive an expression, in terms of the resistances R1 and R2, for the gain of the amplifier
circuit.
[4]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/O/N/17

15
R2
(b) In the circuit of Fig. 7.1, the ratio is 4.5.
R1
The variation with time t of the input potential VIN is shown in Fig. 7.2.
14
12
10
6
potential / V
4
2 VIN
0
t
–2
–4
–6
–8
–10
–12
–14
Fig. 7.2
On Fig. 7.2, show the variation with time t of the output potential VOUT. [3]
[Total: 11]

16
8 A thin slice of conducting material is placed normal to a uniform magnetic field of flux density B, as
shown in Fig. 8.1.
magnetic field
flux density B
F E
S
R
C D
P Q
current I
Fig. 8.1
The magnetic field is normal to face CDEF and to face PQRS.
A current I passes through the slice and is normal to the faces CDQP and FERS.
A potential difference, the Hall voltage VH, is developed across the slice.
(a) State the faces between which the Hall voltage VH is developed.
................................................................... and ................................................................... [1]
(b) The current I is produced by charge carriers, each of charge +q moving at speed v in the
direction of the current. The number density of the charge carriers is n.
(i) Derive an expression relating the Hall voltage VH to v, B and d, where d is one of the
dimensions of the slice.
[3]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/O/N/17

17
(ii) Use your answer in (b)(i) and an expression for the current I in the slice to derive the
expression
BI
VH = .
ntq
[2]
(c) Suggest why the Hall voltage is difficult to detect in a thin slice of copper.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]

18
9 (a) In computed tomography (CT scanning), it is necessary to take a series of many X-ray
images.
Outline briefly the principles of CT scanning.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/O/N/17

19
(b) A student creates a model for CT scanning.

A section is divided into four voxels, with pixel numbers A, B, C and D, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
A B
V1
D C
V2
V4
V3
Fig. 9.1
The section is viewed from four different directions V1, V2, V3 and V4, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
The detector readings for each direction are noted and then summed. The result is shown in
Fig. 9.2.
47 59
44 32
Fig. 9.2
The background count is 26.
Determine the pixel numbers A, B, C and D as shown in Fig. 9.1.
A ............................... B ...............................
D ............................... C ...............................
[3]
[Total: 7]

20
10 (a) The mean value of an alternating current is zero.

Explain why heating occurs when there is an alternating current in a resistor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Transmission of electrical energy is frequently achieved using alternating high voltages.
Suggest why
(i) high voltages are used,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) the voltage is alternating.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/O/N/17

21
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Indium-123 ( 123

49In) is radioactive.
A nucleus of indium-123 emits a γ-ray photon of energy 1.1 MeV.
Determine, for this γ-radiation,
(i) the frequency,
frequency = ................................................... Hz [2]
(ii) the momentum of a photon.
momentum = ................................................... N s [2]
(c) The indium-123 nucleus is stationary before emission of the γ-ray photon.
Use your answer in (b)(ii) to estimate the recoil speed of the nucleus after emission of the
photon.
speed = ................................................ m s−1 [2]
[Total: 7]
22
12 (a) A radiation detector is placed close to a radioactive source. The detector does not surround
the source.
Radiation is emitted in all directions and, as a result, the activity of the source and the
measured count rate are different.
Suggest two other reasons why the activity and the measured count rate may be different.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The variation with time t of the measured count rate in (a) is shown in Fig. 12.1.
180
160
count rate
/ min–1 140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
t / hours
Fig. 12.1
(i) State the feature of Fig. 12.1 that indicates the random nature of radioactive decay.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/O/N/17

23
(ii) Use Fig. 12.1 to determine the half-life of the radioactive isotope in the source.
half-life = ............................................... hours [4]
(c) The readings in (b) were obtained at room temperature.

A second sample of this isotope is heated to a temperature of 500 °C.
The initial count rate at time t = 0 is the same as that in (b).
The variation with time t of the measured count rate from the heated source is determined.
State, with a reason, the difference, if any, in
1. the half-life,
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. the measured count rate for any specific time.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/O/N/17

24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 9702/41/O/N/17

* 8 4 5 2 1 8 5 0 5 7 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours

DC (RW/FD) 127070/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/O/N/17

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
3 V

(x02–x2)
v = ± ω √
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ=
t 1
2

4
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The planet Jupiter and one of its moons, Io, may be considered to be uniform spheres that
are isolated in space.
Jupiter has radius R and mean density ρ.
Io has mass m and is in a circular orbit about Jupiter with radius nR, as illustrated in Fig. 1.1.
Jupiter
radius R
density ρ Io
nR
Fig. 1.1
The time for Io to complete one orbit of Jupiter is T.
Show that the time T is related to the mean density ρ of Jupiter by the expression
3πn3
ρT 2 =
G
[4]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/O/N/17

5
(c) (i) The radius R of Jupiter is 7.15 × 104 km and the distance between the centres of Jupiter
and Io is 4.32 × 105 km.
The period T of the orbit of Io is 42.5 hours.
Calculate the mean density ρ of Jupiter.
ρ = ............................................... kg m–3 [3]
(ii) The Earth has a mean density of 5.5 × 103 kg m–3. It is said to be a planet made of rock.
By reference to your answer in (i), comment on the possible composition of Jupiter.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 10]

6
2 (a) State what is meant by specific latent heat.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A beaker of boiling water is placed on the pan of a balance, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1.
V d.c. supply
heater
balance pan boiling

water
Fig. 2.1
The water is maintained at its boiling point by means of a heater.

The change M in the balance reading in 300 s is determined for two different input powers to
the heater.
The results are shown in Fig. 2.2.
voltmeter reading ammeter reading M/g

/V /A
11.5 5.2 5.0
14.2 6.4 9.1
Fig. 2.2
(i) Energy is supplied continuously by the heater.

State where, in this experiment,
1. external work is done,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. internal energy increases. Explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/O/N/17
7
(ii) Use data in Fig. 2.2 to determine the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water.
specific latent heat = .................................................. J g–1 [3]
[Total: 8]

8
3 (a) (i) Define the radian.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State, by reference to simple harmonic motion, what is meant by angular frequency.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A thin metal strip, clamped horizontally at one end, has a load of mass M attached to its free
end, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
clamp L
x oscillation
metal strip of load
load
mass M
Fig. 3.1
The metal strip bends, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
When the free end of the strip is displaced vertically and then released, the mass oscillates in
a vertical plane.
Theory predicts that the variation of the acceleration a of the oscillating load with the
displacement x from its equilibrium position is given by
c
a = –c mx
ML3
where L is the effective length of the metal strip and c is a positive constant.
(i) Explain how the expression shows that the load is undergoing simple harmonic motion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/O/N/17

9
(ii) For a metal strip of length L = 65 cm and a load of mass M = 240 g, the frequency of
oscillation is 3.2 Hz.
Calculate the constant c.
c = ........................................... kg m3 s–2 [3]
[Total: 8]

10
4 (a) Explain the principles behind the generation of ultrasound waves for diagnosis in medicine.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/O/N/17

11
(b) Ultrasound frequencies as high as 10 MHz are used in medical diagnosis.

Suggest one advantage of the use of high-frequency ultrasound rather than lower-frequency
ultrasound.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]

12
5 The analogue signal from a microphone is to be transmitted in digital form.

The variation with time t of part of the signal from the microphone is shown in Fig. 5.1.
16
14
microphone
output / mV
12
10
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
t / ms
Fig. 5.1
The microphone output is sampled at a frequency of 5.0 kHz by an analogue-to-digital converter

(ADC).
The output from the ADC is a series of 4-bit numbers. The smallest bit represents 1.0 mV.
The first sample is taken at time t = 0.
(a) Use Fig. 5.1 to complete Fig. 5.2.
time t / ms microphone output / mV ADC output
0.2 ................................................... ............................
0.8 ................................................... ............................
Fig. 5.2 [2]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/O/N/17

13
(b) After transmission of the digital signal, it is converted back to an analogue signal using a
digital-to-analogue converter (DAC).
Using data from Fig. 5.1, draw, on the axes of Fig. 5.3, the output level from the DAC for the
transmitted signal from time t = 0 to time t = 1.2 ms.
16
14
output
level
12
10
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
t / ms
Fig. 5.3
[4]
(c) It is usual in modern telecommunication systems for the ADC and the DAC to have more than
four bits in each sample.
State and explain the effect on the transmitted analogue signal of such an increase.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

14
6 (a) For any point outside a spherical conductor, the charge on the sphere may be considered to
act as a point charge at its centre. By reference to electric field lines, explain this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) An isolated spherical conductor has charge q, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
x
sphere,
charge q
P
Fig. 6.1
Point P is a movable point that, at any one time, is a distance x from the centre of the sphere.
The variation with distance x of the electric potential V at point P due to the charge on the
sphere is shown in Fig. 6.2.
14
12
V / 103 V
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
x / cm
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/O/N/17

15
Use Fig. 6.2 to determine
(i) the electric field strength E at point P where x = 6.0 cm,
E = ................................................ N C–1 [3]
(ii) the radius R of the sphere. Explain your answer.
R = .................................................... cm [2]
[Total: 7]

16
7 (a) Feedback is used frequently in amplifier circuits.
State
(i) what is meant by feedback,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) two benefits of negative feedback in an amplifier circuit.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) An amplifier circuit incorporating an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is used to amplify the
output of a microphone. The circuit is shown in Fig. 7.1.
+5.0 V
P
+
–
92.5 kΩ
–5.0 V
V OUT
R
Fig. 7.1
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/O/N/17

17
When the potential at point P is 48 mV, the output potential difference VOUT is 3.6 V.
(i) Determine
1. the gain of the amplifier circuit,
gain = .......................................................... [2]
2. the resistance of resistor R.
resistance = ...................................................... Ω [2]
(ii) State and explain the effect on the amplifier output when the potential at P exceeds
68 mV.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 10]

18
8 A thin slice of conducting material is placed normal to a uniform magnetic field, as shown in
Fig. 8.1.
magnetic
field
F E
S
R
C D
P Q
current I
Fig. 8.1
The magnetic field is normal to face CDEF and to face PQRS.
The current I in the slice is normal to the faces CDQP and FERS.
A potential difference, the Hall voltage VH, is developed across the slice.
(a) (i) State the faces between which the Hall voltage VH is developed.
................................................................ and .............................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain why a constant voltage VH is developed between the faces you have named
in (i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/O/N/17

19
(b) Two slices have similar dimensions. One slice is made of a metal and the other slice is made
of a semiconductor material.
For the same values of magnetic flux density and current, state which slice, if either, will give
rise to the larger Hall voltage. Explain your reasoning.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]

20
9 (a) State what is meant by a field of force.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain the use of a uniform magnetic field and a uniform electric field for the selection of the
velocity of charged particles. You may draw a diagram if you wish.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/O/N/17

21
(c) A beam of charged particles enters a region of uniform magnetic and electric fields, as
region of uniform
magnetic and
electric fields
path of particle
mass m
charge +q
velocity v
magnetic field
into plane of
paper
Fig. 9.1
The direction of the magnetic field is into the plane of the paper. The velocity of the charged
particles is normal to the magnetic field as the particles enter the field.
A particle in the beam has mass m, charge +q and velocity v. The particle passes undeviated
through the region of the two fields.
On Fig. 9.1, sketch the path of a particle that has
(i) mass m, charge +2q and velocity v (label this path Q), [1]
(ii) mass m, charge +q and velocity slightly larger than v (label this path V). [2]
[Total: 9]

22
10 (a) A metal surface is illuminated with light of a single wavelength λ.

On Fig. 10.1, sketch the variation with λ of the maximum kinetic energy EMAX of the electrons
emitted from the surface.
On your graph mark, with the symbol λ0, the threshold wavelength.
EMAX
0
λ
Fig. 10.1 [3]
(b) A neutron is moving in a straight line with momentum p.

The de Broglie wavelength associated with this neutron is λ.
On Fig. 10.2, sketch the variation with momentum p of the de Broglie wavelength λ.
0
0 p
Fig. 10.2 [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/O/N/17

23
11 The circuit for a full-wave rectifier using four ideal diodes is shown in Fig. 11.1.
X A
input
Y
Fig. 11.1
A resistor R is connected across the output AB of the rectifier.
(a) On Fig. 11.1,
(i) draw a circle around any diodes that conduct when the terminal X of the input is positive
with respect to terminal Y, [1]
(ii) label the positive (+) and the negative (–) terminals of the output AB. [1]

24
(b) The variation with time t of the potential difference V across the input XY is given by the
expression
V = 5.6 sin 380t
where V is measured in volts and t is measured in seconds.
The variation with time t of the rectified potential difference across the resistor R is shown in
Fig. 11.2.
6
rectified
potential
difference
/V
4
0
t1 t2 t
Fig. 11.2
Use the expression for the input potential difference V, or otherwise, to determine
(i) the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) potential difference Vr.m.s. of the input,
Vr.m.s. = ...................................................... V [1]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/O/N/17

25
(ii) the number of times per second that the rectified potential difference at the output
reaches a peak value.
number = .......................................................... [2]
(c) A capacitor is now connected between the terminals AB of the output.

The capacitor reduces the variation (the ripple) in the output to 1.6 V.
(i) On Fig. 11.2, sketch the variation with time t of the smoothed output voltage for time
t = t1 to time t = t2. [4]
(ii) Suggest and explain the effect, if any, on the mean power dissipation in resistor R when
the capacitor is connected between terminals AB.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 11]

26
12 The isotope iodine-131 ( 131 –2 –1

53I) is radioactive with a decay constant of 8.6 × 10 day .
–
β particles are emitted with a maximum energy of 0.61 MeV.
(a) State what is meant by
(i) radioactive,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) decay constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain why the emitted β– particles have a range of energies.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) A sample of blood contains 1.2 × 10–9 g of iodine-131.
Determine, for this sample of blood,
(i) the activity of the iodine-131,
activity = .................................................... Bq [3]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/O/N/17

27
(ii) the time for the activity of the iodine-131 to be reduced to 1/50 of the activity calculated
in (i).
time = ................................................. days [2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/O/N/17

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 9702/42/O/N/17

* 4 3 9 9 4 6 1 9 4 5 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
2 hours

DC (KS) 169766
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/O/N/18

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
3 V

(x02–x2)
v = ± ω √
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ=
t 1
2

4
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/O/N/18

5
1 (a) (i) State what is meant by gravitational potential at a point.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Suggest why, for small changes in height near the Earth’s surface, gravitational potential
is approximately constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The Moon may be considered to be a uniform sphere with a diameter of 3.5 × 103 km and a
mass of 7.4 × 1022 kg.
A meteor strikes the Moon and, during the collision, a rock is sent off from the surface of the
Moon with an initial speed v.
Assuming that the Moon is isolated in space, determine the minimum speed of the rock such
that it does not return to the Moon’s surface. Explain your working.
minimum speed = ................................................. m s–1 [3]
[Total: 7]

6
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) An ideal gas undergoes a cycle of changes as shown in Fig. 2.1.
3.00
2.80 Q 372 K
pressure
/ 105 Pa
2.60
97.0 J
2.40
2.20
280 K
P R
332 K
2.00
900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150
volume / cm3
Fig. 2.1
At point P, the gas has volume 950 cm3, pressure 2.10 × 105 Pa and temperature 280 K.
The gas is heated at constant volume and 97.0 J of thermal energy is transferred to the gas.
Its pressure and temperature change so that the gas is at point Q on Fig. 2.1.
The gas then undergoes the change from point Q to point R and then from point R back to
point P, as shown on Fig. 2.1.
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/O/N/18

7
Some energy changes that take place during the cycle PQRP are shown in Fig. 2.2.
change P → Q change Q → R change R → P
thermal energy transferred to gas / J +97.0 0 ........................
work done on gas / J ........................ –42.5 +37.0
increase in internal energy of gas / J ........................ ........................ ........................
Fig. 2.2
(i) State the total change in internal energy of the gas during the complete cycle PQRP.
Explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) On Fig. 2.2, complete the energy changes for the gas during
1. the change P → Q,
2. the change Q → R,
3. the change R → P.
[5]
[Total: 9]

8
3 A U-tube contains liquid, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
x
liquid x
liquid
L
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2
The total length of the column of liquid in the tube is L.
The column of liquid is displaced so that the change in height of the liquid in each arm of the
U-tube is x, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
The liquid in the U-tube then oscillates with simple harmonic motion such that the acceleration a of
the column is given by the expression
2g
a = –e ox
L
(a) Calculate the period T of oscillation of the liquid column for a column length L of 19.0 cm.
T = ....................................................... s [3]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/O/N/18

9
(b) The variation with time t of the displacement x is shown in Fig. 3.3.
+2.0
x / cm
+1.0
0
0 T 2T 3T
t
–1.0
–2.0
Fig. 3.3
The period of oscillation of the liquid column of mass 18.0 g is T.
The oscillations are damped.
(i) Suggest one cause of the damping.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the loss in total energy of the oscillations during the first 2.5 periods of the
oscillations.
energy loss = ....................................................... J [3]
[Total: 7]

10
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/O/N/18

11
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The fraction of the incident intensity of an ultrasound beam that is reflected at a boundary
between two media depends on the specific acoustic impedances Z1 and Z2 of the
media.
Discuss qualitatively how the relative magnitudes of the two specific acoustic impedances
affect the reflected intensity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 10]

12
5 (a) State two advantages of the transmission of data in digital form, compared with the
transmission in analogue form.
1. . ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The digital numbers shown in Fig. 5.1 are transmitted at a sampling rate of 500 Hz.
0111 1011 1001 0100 1110 0101 0010
end of start of
transmission transmission
Fig. 5.1
The digital numbers are received, after transmission, by a digital-to-analogue converter

(DAC).
On Fig. 5.2, complete the graph to show the variation with time t of the signal level from the
DAC.
16
14
12
signal
level 10
0
0
t / ms
Fig. 5.2
[4]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/O/N/18

13
(c) State the effect on the transmitted analogue signal when
(i) the sampling rate of the analogue-to-digital converter (ADC) and of the DAC is increased,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the number of bits in each sample is increased.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

14
6 (a) (i) Define electric potential at a point.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State the relationship between electric potential and electric field strength at a point.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Two parallel metal plates A and B are situated a distance 1.2 cm apart in a vacuum, as shown
in Fig. 6.1.
–75 V
plate B
helium nucleus
1.2 cm
0V
plate A
Fig. 6.1
Plate A is earthed and plate B is at a potential of –75 V.
A helium nucleus is situated between the plates, a distance x from plate A.
Initially, the helium nucleus is at rest on plate A where x = 0.
(i) The helium nucleus is free to move between the plates. By considering energy changes
of the helium nucleus, explain why the speed at which it reaches plate B is independent
of the separation of the plates.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/O/N/18

15
(ii) As the helium nucleus (42He) moves from plate A towards plate B, its distance x from
plate A increases.
Calculate the speed of the nucleus after it has moved a distance x = 0.40 cm from plate A.
speed = ................................................. m s–1 [3]
[Total: 9]

16
7 (a) An ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) has infinite bandwidth and infinite slew rate.
State what is meant by
(i) infinite bandwidth,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) An incomplete circuit for a non-inverting amplifier incorporating an ideal operational amplifier
is shown in Fig. 7.1.
+5.0 V
–
+
R1
–5.0 V
V IN V OUT
R2
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, draw lines to show the connections between the components to complete the
circuit. [2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/O/N/18

17
(c) The completed amplifier of Fig. 7.1 has a voltage gain of 10.
State the output voltage VOUT for an input voltage VIN of
(i) –0.36 V,
VOUT = ....................................................... V [1]
(ii) 0.56 V.
VOUT = ....................................................... V [1]
[Total: 8]

18
8 (a) Explain what is meant by a magnetic field.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A particle has mass m, charge +q and speed v.
The particle enters a uniform magnetic field of flux density B such that, on entry, it is moving
normal to the magnetic field, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
path of particle
mass m
charge +q
speed v
region of
magnetic field
Fig. 8.1
The direction of the magnetic field is perpendicular to, and into, the plane of the paper.
(i) On Fig. 8.1, draw the path of the particle through, and beyond, the region of the magnetic
field. [3]
(ii) There is a force acting on the particle, causing it to accelerate.

Explain why the speed of the particle on leaving the magnetic field is v.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/O/N/18

19
(c) The particle in (b) loses an electron so that its charge becomes +2q. Its change in mass is
negligible.
Determine, in terms of v, the initial speed of the particle such that its path through the magnetic
field is unchanged. Explain your working.
speed = .......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]

20
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A solenoid S is wound on a soft-iron core, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
coil C
solenoid S
soft-iron core
V
Hall probe
Fig. 9.1
A coil C having 120 turns of wire is wound on to one end of the core. The area of cross-
section of coil C is 1.5 cm2.
A Hall probe is close to the other end of the core.
When there is a constant current in solenoid S, the flux density in the core is 0.19 T. The
reading on the voltmeter connected to the Hall probe is 0.20 V.
The current in solenoid S is now reversed in a time of 0.13 s at a constant rate.
(i) Calculate the reading on the voltmeter connected to coil C during the time that the current
is changing.
reading = ....................................................... V [2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/O/N/18

21
(ii) Complete Fig. 9.2 for the voltmeter readings for the times before, during and after the
direction of the current is reversed.
before current during current after current

changes change when changes
current is zero
reading on voltmeter
connected to coil C / V .......................... .......................... ..........................
reading on voltmeter
connected to Hall probe / V 0.20 .......................... ..........................
Fig. 9.2
[4]
[Total: 8]

22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/O/N/18

23
10 Some of the electron energy bands in a semiconductor material at the absolute zero of temperature
are shown in Fig. 10.1.
conduction band (empty)
forbidden band
valence band (filled)
Fig. 10.1
Use band theory to explain why, as the temperature of the semiconductor material rises, the
electrical resistance of the sample of material decreases.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[5]

24
11 A stationary isolated nucleus emits a γ-ray photon of energy 0.51MeV.
(a) State what is meant by a photon.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) For the γ-ray photon, calculate
(i) its wavelength,
wavelength = ...................................................... m [2]
(ii) its momentum.
momentum = .....................................................N s [2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/O/N/18

25
(c) (i) For this nucleus, determine the change in mass Δm during the decay that gives rise to
the energy of the γ-ray photon.
Δm = ..................................................... kg [2]
(ii) Explain why, after the decay, the nucleus is no longer stationary.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]

26
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The variation with time t of the number N of undecayed nuclei in a sample of a radioactive
isotope is shown in Fig. 12.1.
6.0
5.0
N / 1010
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
t / hours
Fig. 12.1
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/O/N/18

27
(i) Use the gradient of the line in Fig. 12.1 to determine the activity, in Bq, of the sample at
time t = 4.0 hours. Show your working.
activity = ..................................................... Bq [3]
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to show that the decay constant λ of the isotope is approximately
4 × 10–5 s–1.
[2]
(c) A sample of a different radioactive isotope has an initial activity of 4.6 × 103 Bq. The sample
must be stored safely until its activity is reduced to 1.0 × 103 Bq.
The decay constant of the isotope is 5.5 × 10–7 s–1. The decay products are not radioactive.
Calculate the minimum time, in days, for which the sample must be stored.
time = ................................................. days [3]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/O/N/18

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 9702/41/O/N/18

* 9 6 9 3 3 7 9 2 5 3 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours

DC (ST/FC) 146701/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/O/N/18

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
3 V

(x02–x2)
v = ± ω √
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ=
t 1
2

4
1 (a) (i) State what is meant by gravitational field strength.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why, at the surface of a planet, gravitational field strength is numerically equal to
the acceleration of free fall.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) An isolated uniform spherical planet has radius R.

The acceleration of free fall at the surface of the planet is g.
On Fig. 1.1, sketch a graph to show the variation of the acceleration of free fall with distance
x from the centre of the planet for values of x in the range x = R to x = 4R.
1.00 g
acceleration
of free fall 0.75 g
0.50 g
0.25 g
0
0 R 2R 3R 4R
x
Fig. 1.1
[3]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/O/N/18

5
(c) The planet in (b) has radius R equal to 3.4 × 103 km and mean density 4.0 × 103 kg m–3.
Calculate the acceleration of free fall at a height R above its surface.
acceleration of free fall = ................................................. m s–2 [3]
[Total: 8]

6
2 (a) State what is meant by an ideal gas.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) An ideal gas comprised of single atoms is contained in a cylinder and has a volume of
1.84 × 10–2 m3 at a pressure of 2.12 × 107 Pa.
The mass of gas in the cylinder is 3.20 kg.
(i) Determine, to three significant figures, the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of the atoms
of the gas.
r.m.s. speed = ..................................................m s–1 [3]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/O/N/18

7
(ii) The temperature of the gas in the cylinder is 22 °C.
Determine, to three significant figures,
1. the amount, in mol, of the gas,
amount = ................................................... mol [2]
2. the mass of one atom of the gas.
mass = ..................................................... kg [2]
(c) Use your answer in (b)(ii) part 2 to determine the nucleon number A of an atom of the gas.
A = .......................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]

8
3 (a) Define specific latent heat of fusion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A student sets up the apparatus shown in Fig. 3.1 in order to investigate the melting of ice.
A
+
V
–
pure melting
ice
heater
beaker
water
Fig. 3.1
The heater is switched on.

When the pure ice is melting at a constant rate, the data shown in Fig. 3.2 are collected.
initial mass of final mass of

voltmeter reading ammeter reading time of collection
beaker beaker
/V /A / minutes
plus water / g plus water / g
12.8 4.60 121.5 185.0 5.00
Fig. 3.2
The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 332 J g–1.
(i) State what is observed by the student that shows that the ice is melting at a constant
rate.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/O/N/18

9
(ii) Use the data in Fig. 3.2 to determine the rate at which
1. thermal energy is transferred to the melting ice,
rate = .......................................................... W
2. thermal energy is gained from the surroundings.
rate = .......................................................... W
[4]
[Total: 7]

10
4 A U-tube contains liquid, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
x
x
liquid
Fig. 4.1 Fig. 4.2
The total length of the liquid column is L.
The column of liquid is displaced so that the change in height of the liquid level from the equilibrium
position in each arm of the U-tube is x, as shown in Fig. 4.2.
The liquid in the U-tube then oscillates such that its acceleration a is given by the expression
a =-d
2g
nx
L
(a) Show that the liquid column undergoes simple harmonic motion.
[2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/O/N/18

11
(b) The variation with time t of the displacement x is shown in Fig. 4.3.
+2.0
x / cm
+1.0
0
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
t /s
–1.0
–2.0
Fig. 4.3
Use data from Fig. 4.3 to determine the length L of the liquid column.
L = ...................................................... m [3]

12
(c) The oscillations shown in Fig. 4.3 are damped.
(i) Suggest one cause of this damping.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the ratio
total energy of oscillations after 1.5 complete oscillations

total initial energy of oscillations
ratio = .......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/O/N/18

13
BLANK PAGE

14
5 (a) In radio communication, the radio wave is usually modulated.
State what is meant by amplitude modulation (AM ).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A sinusoidal radio carrier wave has a frequency of 900 kHz and an unmodulated amplitude
measured to be 4.0 V.
The carrier wave is amplitude modulated by a signal of frequency 5.0 kHz.
For the amplitude modulated wave,
(i) determine the wavelength,
wavelength = ...................................................... m [1]
(ii) describe the amplitude variation,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) state the bandwidth.
bandwidth = .................................................... Hz [1]
(c) Communication is sometimes made using satellites in geostationary orbits that have a period
of rotation about the Earth of 24 hours.
(i) State two other features, apart from the period, of a geostationary orbit.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/O/N/18

15
(ii) Suggest why
1. frequencies of the order of gigahertz are used for satellite communication,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
2. the uplink frequency to the satellite is different from the downlink frequency.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 11]

16
6 (a) State
(i) what is meant by the electric potential at a point,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) the relationship between electric potential at a point and electric field strength at the
point.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Two similar solid metal spheres A and B, each of radius R, are situated in a vacuum such that
the separation of their centres is D, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
sphere A sphere B
R R
charge +Q charge +q
Fig. 6.1
The charge +Q on sphere A is larger than the charge +q on sphere B.
A movable point P is located on the line joining the centres of the two spheres.
The point P is a distance x from the centre of sphere A.
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/O/N/18

17
On Fig. 6.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with x of the electric potential V between the
centres of the two spheres.
0
0 D x
surface of surface of
sphere A sphere B
Fig. 6.2
[4]
[Total: 8]

18
7 A circuit incorporating an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is shown in Fig. 7.1.
+5.0 V
+5.0 V
RT 1.8 kΩ –
–5.0 V
VOUT
R 2.4 kΩ
Fig. 7.1
The variation with temperature θ of the resistance RT of the thermistor is shown in Fig. 7.2.
3.4
3.3
RT / k Ω
3.2
3.1
3.0
2 3 4 5 6 7
θ / °C
Fig. 7.2
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/O/N/18

19
(a) The output potential VOUT of the op-amp circuit changes sign when the temperature of the
thermistor is 4.0 °C.
Calculate the resistance R.
R = .................................................... kΩ [2]
(b) State and explain whether the output potential VOUT is +5.0 V or −5.0 V for a thermistor
temperature of 2.5 °C.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) The output of the op-amp is to be displayed using two light-emitting diodes (LEDs) labelled G
and B.
When the temperature of the thermistor is below 4.0 °C, only the LED labelled G emits light.
The LED labelled B emits light only when the temperature of the thermistor is above 4.0 °C.
On Fig. 7.1, draw and label the symbols for the two LEDs. [3]
[Total: 8]

20
8 (a) Define magnetic flux density.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) A stiff copper wire is balanced horizontally on a pivot, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
7.5 cm
P pivot stiff wire
S
Q
Fig. 8.1
Sections PQ, QR and RS of the wire are situated in a uniform magnetic field of flux density B
produced between the poles of a permanent magnet.
The perpendicular distance of PQRS from the pivot is 7.5 cm.
When a current of 2.7 A is passed through the wire, a small mass of 45 mg is placed a distance
8.8 cm from the pivot in order to restore the balance of the wire, as shown in Fig. 8.2.
small mass
7.5 cm 8.8 cm
2.7 A
2.7 A
P pivot stiff wire
S
Q
R
pole pieces
of magnet
Fig. 8.2
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/O/N/18

21
(i) Explain why, when the current is switched on, the current in the sections PQ and RS of
the wire does not affect the balance of the wire.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The length of section QR of the wire is 1.2 cm.

Calculate the magnetic flux density B.
B = ....................................................... T [3]
[Total: 8]

22
9 (a) A Hall probe is placed near one end of a solenoid that has been wound on a soft-iron core, as
shown in Fig. 9.1.
+ – soft-iron
core
solenoid Hall probe
Fig. 9.1
The current in the solenoid is switched on.

The Hall probe is rotated until the reading VH on the voltmeter is maximum.
The current in the solenoid is then varied, causing the magnetic flux density to change.
The variation with time t of the magnetic flux density B at the Hall probe is shown in Fig. 9.2.
2
B / mT
1
0
0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t
–1
–2
Fig. 9.2
At time t = 0, the Hall voltage is V0.

On Fig. 9.3, draw a line to show the variation with time t of the Hall voltage VH for time t = 0 to
time t = t4.
VH
V0
0
0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t
Fig. 9.3
[2]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/O/N/18

23
(b) The Hall probe in (a) is now replaced by a small coil of wire connected to a sensitive voltmeter,
+ – soft-iron
core
solenoid small coil

of wire
Fig. 9.4
The magnetic flux density, normal to the plane of the small coil, is again varied as shown in
Fig. 9.2.
On Fig. 9.5, draw a line to show the variation with time t of the e.m.f. E induced in the small
coil for time t = 0 to time t = t4.
0
0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t
Fig. 9.5
[3]
[Total: 5]

24
10 (a) The root-mean-square (r.m.s.) value of the voltage of a sinusoidal alternating supply is 9.9 V.
The frequency of the supply is 50 Hz.
Derive an expression for the variation with time t (in second) of the potential difference V
(in volt) of the supply.
V = .......................................................... [2]
(b) Explain the function of the non-uniform magnetic field superposed on the large constant
magnetic field in diagnosis using magnetic resonance imaging (NMRI).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/O/N/18

25
(c) A parallel beam of X-rays of intensity I0 is incident normally on some soft tissue and bone, as
0.40 cm
intensity I0 bone intensity I
soft tissue
1.8 cm
Fig. 10.1
The bone is 0.40 cm thick and the total thickness of the bone and the soft tissue is 1.8 cm.
The intensity of the transmitted beam is I.
Data for the linear attenuation (absorption) coefficient μ of bone and of soft tissue are given in
Fig. 10.2.
μ / cm–1
bone 2.9
soft tissue 0.92
Fig. 10.2
Calculate, in dB, the ratio
transmitted intensity I
.
incident intensity I0
ratio = .................................................... dB [4]
[Total: 9]
26
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Describe the appearance of a visible line emission spectrum, as seen using a diffraction
grating.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The lowest electron energy levels in an isolated hydrogen atom are shown in Fig. 11.1.
– 0.54 – 0.38
–1.50 – 0.85
– 3.40
energy / eV
–13.6
(i) An electron is initially at the energy level –0.85 eV. State the total number of different
wavelengths that may be emitted as the electron de-excites (loses energy).
number = .......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/O/N/18

27
(ii) Photons resulting from electron de-excitation from the –0.85 eV energy level are incident
on the surface of a sample of platinum.
Platinum has a work function energy of 5.6 eV.
Determine
1. the maximum kinetic energy, in eV, of a photoelectron emitted from the surface of
the platinum,
maximum energy = .................................................... eV [2]
2. the wavelength of the photon producing the photoelectron in (ii) part 1.
wavelength = ...................................................... m [3]
[Total: 10]
12 (a) State what is meant by nuclear fusion and nuclear fission.
nuclear fusion: ..........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
nuclear fission: ..........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]

28
(b) A nuclear reaction which may, in the future, be used for the generation of electrical energy is
2H + 3H 4 He + x .
1 1 2
(i) Name the particle x.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Data for the binding energy per nucleon EB of some nuclei are given in Fig. 12.1.
binding energy per nucleon

EB / 10–13 J
deuterium 2H
1
1.7813
tritium 3H
1
4.5285
helium 4 He
2
11.3290
Fig. 12.1
1. State the binding energy per nucleon of x.
binding energy per nucleon = ............................................................ J
2. Calculate the energy change that takes place in this reaction.
energy change = ............................................................ J

[3]
(iii) Use your answer in (ii) part 2 to determine the energy release when 2.0 g of deuterium ( 21 H)
reacts with 3.0 g of tritium ( 31 H).
energy = ....................................................... J [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 9702/42/O/N/18
* 2 2 9 2 7 5 9 2 4 8 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
2 hours

DC (CJ) 184817
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/O/N/19

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
3 V

v =±ω√ (x02 – x2)

fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A geostationary satellite orbits the Earth. The orbit of the satellite is circular and the period of
the orbit is 24 hours.
(i) State two other features of this orbit.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The radius of the orbit of the satellite is 4.23 × 104 km.
Determine a value for the mass of the Earth. Explain your working.
mass = ..................................................... kg [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/O/N/19

5
2 (a) The kinetic theory of gases is based on a number of assumptions about the molecules of a
gas.
State the assumption that is related to the volume of the molecules of the gas.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) An ideal gas occupies a volume of 2.40 × 10–2 m3 at a pressure of 4.60 × 105 Pa and a
temperature of 23 °C.
(i) Calculate the number of molecules in the gas.
number = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) Each molecule has a diameter of approximately 3 × 10–10 m.
Estimate the total volume of the gas molecules.
volume = .................................................... m3 [3]
(c) By reference to your answer in (b)(ii), suggest why the assumption in (a) is justified.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]

6
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/O/N/19

7
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A student determines the specific latent heat of vaporisation of a liquid using the apparatus
+
V
liquid A –
heater
pan of balance
Fig. 3.1
The heater is switched on. When the liquid is boiling at a constant rate, the balance reading is
noted at 2.0 minute intervals.
After 10 minutes, the current in the heater is reduced and the balance readings are taken for
a further 12 minutes.

8
The readings of the ammeter and of the voltmeter are given in Fig. 3.2.
ammeter reading voltmeter reading

/A /V
from time 0 to time 10 minutes 1.2 230
after time 10 minutes 1.0 190
Fig. 3.2
The variation with time of the balance reading is shown in Fig. 3.3.
500
480
balance reading / g
460
440
420
400
380
0 4 8 12 16 20 24
time / minutes
Fig. 3.3
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/O/N/19

9
(i) From time 0 to time 10.0 minutes, the mass of liquid evaporated is 56 g.
Use Fig. 3.3 to determine the mass of liquid evaporated from time 12.0 minutes to time
22.0 minutes.
mass = ....................................................... g [1]
(ii) Explain why, although the power of the heater is changed, the rate of loss of thermal
energy to the surroundings may be assumed to be constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Determine a value for the specific latent heat of vaporisation L of the liquid.
L = ................................................. J g–1 [4]
(iv) Calculate the rate at which thermal energy is transferred to the surroundings.
rate = ..................................................... W [2]
[Total: 10]

10
4 A mass is suspended vertically from a fixed point by means of a spring, as illustrated in Fig. 4.1.
spring
mass
Fig. 4.1
The mass is oscillating vertically. The variation with displacement x of the acceleration a of the
mass is shown in Fig. 4.2.
1.5
a / m s–2
1.0
0.5
0
–1.5 –1.0 –0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5
x / cm
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
Fig. 4.2
(a) (i) State what is meant by the displacement of the mass on the spring.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/O/N/19

11
(ii) Suggest how Fig. 4.2 shows that the mass is not performing simple harmonic motion.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) The amplitude of oscillation of the mass may be changed.
State the maximum amplitude x0 for which the oscillations are simple harmonic.
x0 = .................................................... cm [1]
(ii) For the simple harmonic oscillations of the mass, use Fig. 4.2 to determine the frequency
of the oscillations.
frequency = .................................................... Hz [3]
(c) The maximum speed of the mass when oscillating with simple harmonic motion of amplitude
x0 is v0.
On Fig. 4.3, show the variation with displacement x of the velocity v of the mass for
displacements from +x0 to –x0.
v
v0
0
–x0 0 x0
x
–v0
Fig. 4.3
[2]
[Total: 8]

12
5 (a) A section of a coaxial cable is shown in Fig. 5.1.
copper braid
insulation
copper
wire
plastic covering
Fig. 5.1
(i) Suggest two functions of the copper braid.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Suggest one application of a coaxial cable for the transmission of electrical signals.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) The constant noise power in a transmission cable is 7.6 μW. The minimum acceptable
signal-to-noise ratio is 32 dB.
Calculate the minimum acceptable signal power PMIN in the cable.
PMIN = ......................................................W [2]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/O/N/19

13
(ii) The input power of the signal to the transmission cable is 2.6 W. The attenuation per unit
length of the cable is 6.3 dB km–1.
Use your answer in (i) to determine the maximum uninterrupted length L of cable along
which the signal may be transmitted.
L = .................................................... km [2]
[Total: 7]

14
6 (a) State an expression for the electric field strength E at a distance r from a point charge Q in a
vacuum.
State the name of any other symbol used.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Two point charges A and B are situated a distance 10.0 cm apart in a vacuum, as illustrated in
Fig. 6.1.
charge A charge B
10.0 cm
Fig. 6.1
A point P lies on the line joining the charges A and B. Point P is a distance x from A.
2.5
E / 10–2 N C–1
2.0
1.5
1.0
0 2 4 6 8 10
x / cm
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/O/N/19

15
State and explain whether the charges A and B:
(i) have the same, or opposite, signs
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) have the same, or different, magnitudes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) An electron is situated at point P.
Without calculation, state and explain the variation in the magnitude of the acceleration of the
electron as it moves from the position where x = 3 cm to the position where x = 7 cm.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 10]

16
7 (a) An ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) has infinite bandwidth and zero output impedance.
(i) infinite bandwidth
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) zero output impedance.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The circuit for a non-inverting amplifier incorporating an ideal op-amp is shown in Fig. 7.1.
4.0 kΩ
+5.0 V
–
–5.0 V V OUT
V IN 800 Ω
R
Fig. 7.1
The light-emitting diode (LED) emits light when the potential difference across it is at
least 2.0 V.
The current in the LED must not be greater than 20 mA.
(i) Calculate the gain of the amplifier circuit.
gain = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/O/N/19

17
(ii) Determine the value of VIN for which the value of VOUT is +2.0 V.
VIN = ...................................................... V [1]
(iii) State the maximum value of the output potential VOUT.
maximum potential = ...................................................... V [1]
(iv) When the op-amp is saturated, the potential difference across the LED is 2.2 V.
Calculate the minimum resistance of resistor R so that the current in the LED is limited to
20 mA.
resistance = ...................................................... Ω [2]
[Total: 8]

18
8 (a) A long straight vertical wire carries a current I. The wire passes through a horizontal card
EFGH, as shown in Fig. 8.1 and Fig. 8.2.
current out of
plane of paper
H G
I wire
H G
E F
E F
Fig. 8.1 Fig. 8.2 (view from above)
On Fig. 8.2, draw the pattern of the magnetic field produced by the current-carrying wire on
the plane EFGH. [3]
(b) Two long straight parallel wires P and Q are situated a distance 3.1 cm apart, as illustrated in
Fig. 8.3.
6.2 A 8.5 A
wire P wire Q
3.1cm
Fig. 8.3
The current in wire P is 6.2 A. The current in wire Q is 8.5 A.
The magnetic flux density B at a distance x from a long straight wire carrying current I is
given by the expression
μ 0I
B=
2πx
where μ0 is the permeability of free space.
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/O/N/19

19
Calculate:
(i) the magnetic flux density at wire Q due to the current in wire P
flux density = ...................................................... T [2]
(ii) the force per unit length, in N m–1, acting on wire Q due to the current in wire P.
force per unit length = ............................................... N m–1 [2]
(c) The currents in wires P and Q are different in magnitude.
State and explain whether the forces per unit length on the two wires will be different.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/O/N/19

21
9 Diagnosis using nuclear magnetic resonance imaging (NMRI) requires the use of a non-uniform
magnetic field superimposed on a constant magnetic field of large magnitude.
Explain the purpose of:
(a) the large constant magnetic field
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) the non-uniform magnetic field.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 4]

22
10 A bridge rectifier using four ideal diodes is shown in Fig. 10.1.
A
B
Fig. 10.1
The sinusoidal alternating electromotive force (e.m.f.) applied between points A and B has a root-
mean-square (r.m.s.) value of 7.0 V.
(a) (i) On Fig. 10.1, circle the diodes that conduct when point B is positive with respect to
point A. [1]
(ii) Calculate the maximum potential difference VMAX across resistor R.
VMAX = ...................................................... V [1]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/O/N/19

23
(b) A capacitor is connected into the circuit to produce smoothing of the potential difference
across resistor R.
The variation with time t of the potential difference V across resistor R is shown in Fig. 10.2.
V magnitude of
ripple
0
t
Fig. 10.2
(i) On Fig. 10.1, draw the symbol for a capacitor, connected so as to produce smoothing.
[1]
(ii) State the effect, if any, on the magnitude of the ripple on V when, separately:
1. a capacitor of larger capacitance is used
...........................................................................................................................................
2. the resistor R has a smaller resistance.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]

24
11 (a) With reference to the photoelectric effect, state what is meant by work function energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The work function energy of a clean metal surface is 5.5 × 10–19 J.
Electromagnetic radiation of wavelength 280 nm is incident on the metal surface. The metal is
in a vacuum.
(i) Calculate:
1. the photon energy
photon energy = ....................................................... J [2]
2. the maximum speed vMAX of the electrons emitted from the surface.
vMAX = ................................................ m s–1 [3]
(ii) Explain why most of the emitted electrons will have a speed lower than vMAX.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/O/N/19

25
(c) The electromagnetic radiation incident on the metal surface may change in intensity or in
frequency.
Complete Fig. 11.1 by inserting either ‘increases’ or ‘decreases’ or ‘no change’ to describe
the effects of the changes shown on the maximum speed and on the rate of emission of
electrons.
maximum speed of rate of emission

change
electrons of electrons
reduced intensity at constant
frequency ................................... ...................................
increased frequency at constant
intensity ................................... ...................................
Fig. 11.1
[4]
[Total: 12]

26
12 One possible nuclear reaction that takes place is
23 5 U + 10n 9 5 Mo + 139 La + 210n + 7–10e

92 42 57
Data for nuclei in this reaction are given in Fig. 12.1.
total mass of separate binding energy

nucleus mass / u mass defect / u
nucleons / u per nucleon / MeV
9 5 Mo 94.906 95.765 0.859 8.443
42
139 La 138.906 140.125 1.219 8.189

57
23 5 U 235.044 236.909 1.865 ..................................

92
Fig. 12.1
(a) Show that the energy equivalent to a mass of 1.00 u is 934 MeV.
[2]
(b) (i) Use data from Fig. 12.1 to calculate the binding energy per nucleon of a nucleus of
uranium-235 (23952U). Complete Fig. 12.1.
[2]
(ii) The nucleon number of an isotope of the element rutherfordium is 267.
State whether the binding energy per nucleon of this isotope will be greater than, equal
to or less than the binding energy per nucleon of uranium-235.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/O/N/19

27
(c) Calculate the total energy, in MeV, released in this nuclear reaction.
energy = ................................................. MeV [2]
(d) The nuclei in 1.2 × 10–7 mol of uranium-235 all undergo this reaction in a time of 25 ms.
Calculate the average power release during the time of 25 ms.
power = ..................................................... W [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/O/N/19

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 9702/41/O/N/19

* 7 0 8 4 2 6 6 4 7 8 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours

DC (LK/CB) 163541/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/O/N/19

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
3 V

(x02–x2)
v = ± ω √
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ=
t 1
2

4
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The astronomer Johannes Kepler showed that the period T of rotation of a planet about the
Sun is related to its mean distance R from the centre of the Sun by the expression
R3 = k
T2
where k is a constant.
Use Newton’s law to show that, for planets in circular orbits about the Sun of mass M, the
constant k is given by
k = GM2
4π
where G is the gravitational constant. Explain your working.
[4]
(c) A satellite is in a circular orbit about Mars.

The radius of the orbit of the satellite is 4.38 × 106 m. The orbital period is 2.44 hours.
Use the expressions in (b) to calculate a value for the mass of Mars.
mass = .................................................... kg [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/O/N/19
5
2 (a) Smoke particles are suspended in still air. Brownian motion of the smoke particles is seen
through a microscope.
Describe:
(i) what is seen through the microscope
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) how Brownian motion provides evidence for the nature of the movement of gas
molecules.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A fixed mass of an ideal gas has volume 2.40 × 103 cm3 at pressure 3.51 × 105 Pa and
temperature 290 K. The gas is heated at constant volume until the temperature is 310 K at
pressure 3.75 × 105 Pa, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1.
2.40 × 103 cm3 2.40 × 103 cm3

3.51 × 105 Pa 3.75 × 105 Pa
290 K 310 K
Fig. 2.1
The quantity of thermal energy required to raise the temperature of 1.00 mol of the gas by
1.00 K at constant volume is 12.5 J.
Calculate, to three significant figures:
(i) the amount, in mol, of the gas
amount = .................................................. mol [3]

6
(ii) the thermal energy transfer during the change.
energy transfer = ...................................................... J [2]
(c) For the change in the gas in (b), state:
(i) the quantity of external work done on the gas
work done = ...................................................... J [1]
(ii) the change in internal energy, with the direction of this change.
change = ........................................................... J
direction ...............................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/O/N/19

7
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A student uses the apparatus illustrated in Fig. 3.1 to determine a value for the specific latent
heat of fusion of ice.
V
ice
heater
beaker
melted ice
pan of
balance
Fig. 3.1
The balance reading measures the mass of the beaker and the melted ice (water) in the
beaker.
The heater is switched on and pieces of ice at 0 °C are added continuously to the funnel so
that the heater is always surrounded by ice.
When water drips out of the funnel at a constant rate, the balance reading is noted at
2.0 minute intervals. After 10 minutes, the current in the heater is increased and the balance
readings are taken for a further 12 minutes.

8
The variation with time of the balance reading is shown in Fig. 3.2.
300
250
mass / g
200
150
100
50
0
0 4 8 12 16 20 24
time / minutes
Fig. 3.2
The readings of the ammeter and of the voltmeter are shown in Fig. 3.3.
ammeter reading voltmeter reading

/A /V
from time 0 to time 10 minutes 1.8 7.3

after time 10 minutes 3.6 15.1
Fig. 3.3
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/O/N/19

9
(i) From time 0 to time 10.0 minutes, 65 g of ice is melted.
Use Fig. 3.2 to determine the mass of ice melted from time 12.0 minutes to time
22.0 minutes.
mass = ...................................................... g [1]
(ii) Explain why, although the power of the heater is changed, the rate at which thermal
energy is transferred from the surroundings to the ice is constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Determine a value for the specific latent heat of fusion L of ice.
L = ................................................. J g–1 [4]
(iv) Calculate the rate at which thermal energy is transferred from the surroundings to the
ice.
rate = ..................................................... W [2]
[Total: 10]

10
4 A ball of mass M is held on a horizontal surface by two identical extended springs, as illustrated in
Fig. 4.1.
ball
mass M oscillator
fixed
point
Fig. 4.1
One spring is attached to a fixed point. The other spring is attached to an oscillator.
The oscillator is switched off. The ball is displaced sideways along the axis of the springs and is
then released. The variation with time t of the displacement x of the ball is shown in Fig. 4.2.
1.5
x / cm
1.0
0.5
0
0 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4
–0.5 t/s
–1.0
–1.5
Fig. 4.2
(a) State:
(i) what is meant by damping
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the evidence provided by Fig. 4.2 that the motion of the ball is damped.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/O/N/19

11
(b) The acceleration a and the displacement x of the ball are related by the expression
2k
a = –c mx
M
where k is the spring constant of one of the springs.
The mass M of the ball is 1.2 kg.
(i) Use data from Fig. 4.2 to determine the angular frequency ω of the oscillations of the
ball.
ω = .............................................. rad s–1 [2]
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to determine the value of k.
k = ............................................... N m–1 [2]

12
(c) The oscillator is switched on. The amplitude of oscillation of the oscillator is constant.
The angular frequency of the oscillations is gradually increased from 0.7ω to 1.3ω, where ω is
the angular frequency calculated in (b)(i).
(i) On the axes of Fig. 4.3, show the variation with angular frequency of the amplitude A of
oscillation of the ball.
0
0.7ω 1.0ω 1.3ω
angular frequency
Fig. 4.3
[2]
(ii) Some sand is now sprinkled on the horizontal surface.
The angular frequency of the oscillations is again gradually increased from 0.7ω to 1.3ω.
State two changes that occur to the line you have drawn on Fig. 4.3.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/O/N/19

13
5 (a) (i) State what is meant by the specific acoustic impedance of a medium.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The density of a sample of bone is 1.8 g cm–3 and the speed of ultrasound in the bone is
4.1 × 103 m s–1.
Calculate the specific acoustic impedance ZB of the sample of bone.
ZB = ......................................... kg m–2 s–1 [1]

14
(b) A parallel beam of ultrasound passes normally through a layer of fat and of muscle, as
fat muscle
beam transmitted beam

of ultrasound of ultrasound
0.45 cm 2.1 cm
The fat has thickness 0.45 cm and the muscle has thickness 2.1 cm.
Data for fat and for muscle are given in Fig. 5.2.
specific acoustic impedance linear attenuation (absorption)

Z / 106 kg m–2 s–1 coefficient μ / cm–1
fat 1.3 0.24

muscle 1.7 0.23
Fig. 5.2
The intensity reflection coefficient α at a boundary between two media of specific acoustic
impedances Z1 and Z2 is given by the expression
(Z 2 - Z 1) 2
α= .
(Z 2 + Z 1) 2
Calculate the fraction of the intensity of the ultrasound that is transmitted through the
boundary between the fat and the muscle.
fraction transmitted = ......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/O/N/19

15
(c) (i) State what is meant by attenuation of an ultrasound wave.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Data for linear attenuation coefficients are given in Fig. 5.2.
Determine the ratio
intensity of ultrasound transmitted through the medium

intensity of ultrasound entering the medium
for:
1. the layer of fat of thickness 0.45 cm
ratio = ...............................................................
2. the layer of muscle of thickness 2.1 cm.
ratio = ...............................................................
[3]
(d) Use your answers in (b) and (c)(ii) to determine the fraction of the intensity entering the layer
of fat that is transmitted through the layer of muscle.
fraction transmitted = ......................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]

16
6 The variation with time of the displacement of an amplitude-modulated (AM) wave is shown in
Fig. 6.1.
signal
displacement
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
time / μs
Fig. 6.1
The sinusoidal information signal has frequency 10 kHz.
(a) Determine the frequency of the carrier wave.
frequency = .................................................... Hz [1]
(b) On the axes of Fig. 6.2, sketch the frequency spectrum of the modulated wave.
signal
intensity
0
frequency / kHz
Fig. 6.2
[3]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/O/N/19

17
7 Describe the principles of computed tomography (CT) scanning.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [5]

18
8 Electrons enter a rectangular slice PQRSEFGH of a semiconductor material at right-angles to

face PQFE, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
magnetic field
flux density B
S
R
G
P
E
F
direction of
incident electrons
Fig. 8.1
A uniform magnetic field of flux density B is directed into the slice, at right-angles to face PQRS.
(a) The electrons each have charge –q and drift speed v in the slice.
State the magnitude and the direction of the force due to the magnetic field on each electron
as it enters the slice.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The force on the electrons causes a voltage VH to be established across the semiconductor
slice given by the expression
VH = BI
ntq
where I is the current in the slice.
(i) State the two faces between which the voltage VH is established.
face ................................. and face ................................. [1]
(ii) Use letters from Fig. 8.1 to identify the distance t.
.......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/O/N/19

19
(c) Aluminium (27 –3

13 Al ) has a density of 2.7 g cm . Assume that there is one free electron available
to carry charge per atom of aluminium.
(i) Show that the number of charge carriers per unit volume in aluminium is 6.0 × 1028 m–3.
[2]
(ii) A sample of aluminium foil has a thickness of 0.090 mm. The current in the foil is 4.6 A.
A uniform magnetic field of flux density 0.15 T acts at right-angles to the foil.
Use the value in (i) to calculate the voltage VH that is generated.
VH = ...................................................... V [2]
[Total: 8]

20
9 (a) Define what is meant by electric potential at a point.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) In an α-particle scattering experiment, α-particles are directed towards a thin film of gold, as
gold film
beam of
α-particles
Fig. 9.1
The apparatus is in a vacuum.
The gold-197 ( 197

79 Au) nuclei in the film may be considered to be fixed point charges.
The α-particles emitted from the source each have an energy of 4.8 MeV.
Calculate:
(i) the initial kinetic energy EK, in J, of an α-particle emitted from the source
EK = ...................................................... J [1]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/O/N/19

21
(ii) the distance d of closest approach of an α-particle to a gold nucleus.
d = ..................................................... m [4]
(c) Use your answer in (b)(ii) to comment on the possible diameter of a gold nucleus.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]

22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/O/N/19

23
10 (a) The upper electron energy bands in an intrinsic semiconductor material are illustrated in
Fig. 10.1.
conduction
band
forbidden
band
valence
band
Fig. 10.1
Use band theory to explain why the resistance of an intrinsic semiconductor material
decreases as its temperature increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]

24
(b) A comparator circuit incorporating an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is shown in

Fig. 10.2.
+3.0 V
+5 V
1.50 kΩ RT
–5 V
VOUT
1.20 kΩ 1.76 kΩ
Fig. 10.2
The variation with temperature θ of the resistance RT of the thermistor is shown in Fig. 10.3.
3.5
3.0
R T / kΩ
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0 5 10 15 20 25
θ / °C
Fig. 10.3
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/O/N/19

25
(i) Determine the temperature at which the light-emitting diode (LED) in Fig. 10.2 switches
on or off.
temperature = ..................................................... °C [4]
(ii) State and explain whether the thermistor is above or below the temperature calculated
in (i) for the LED to emit light.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 11]

26
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A solenoid S has a small coil C placed near to one of its ends, as shown in Fig. 11.1.
solenoid S
3.6 × 10 –2 m
coil C
63 turns
Fig. 11.1
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/O/N/19

27
The coil C has a circular cross-section of diameter 3.6 × 10–2 m and contains 63 turns of wire.
The solenoid S produces a uniform magnetic field of flux density B, in tesla, in the region of
coil C given by the expression
B = 9.4 × 10–4 I
where I is the current, in ampere, in the solenoid S.
The variation with time t of the current I in solenoid S is shown in Fig. 11.2.
current I
0
0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7
time t
Fig. 11.2
State two times at which:
(i) there is no electromotive force (e.m.f.) induced in coil C
time .............................. and time .............................. [1]
(ii) the induced e.m.f. in coil C is a maximum but with opposite polarities.
time .............................. and time .............................. [1]
(c) The alternating current in the solenoid S in (b) is replaced by a constant current of 5.0 A.
Calculate the average e.m.f. induced in coil C when the current in solenoid S is reversed in a
time of 6.0 ms.
e.m.f. induced = ...................................................... V [3]
[Total: 7]

28
12 Radon-222 ( 222
86 Ra) is a radioactive gas that decays randomly with a decay constant of
7.55 × 10–3 hour–1.
(i) random decay
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The activity of radon gas in a sample of 4.80 × 10–3 m3 of air taken from a building is 0.600 Bq.
There are 2.52 × 1025 air molecules in a volume of 1.00 m3 of air.
Calculate, for 1.00 m3 of the air, the ratio
number of air molecules

.
number of radon atoms
ratio = ......................................................... [5]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 9702/42/O/N/19

* 3 5 3 0 4 2 9 4 7 9 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
2 hours
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (KN) 206161
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/O/N/20

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
pressure of an ideal gas p= 3 〈c 〉
V

(x02–x2)
v = ± ω √
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ=
t 1
2

4
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/O/N/20

5
1 (a) (i) State what is meant by a field of force.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Define gravitational field strength.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An isolated planet may be assumed to be a uniform sphere of radius 3.39 × 106 m with its
mass of 6.42 × 1023 kg concentrated at its centre.
Calculate the gravitational field strength at the surface of the planet.
field strength = .............................................. N kg–1 [3]
(c) Calculate the height above the surface of the planet in (b) at which the gravitational field
strength is 1.0% less than its value at the surface of the planet.
height = ..................................................... m [3]
[Total: 9]

6
2 (a) The first law of thermodynamics may be expressed as
ΔU = (+q) + (+w)
where ΔU is the increase in internal energy of the system.
State the meaning of:
+q ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
+w. ............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The variation with pressure p of the volume V of a fixed mass of an ideal gas is shown in
Fig. 2.1.
4.0
B
V / 10 –3 m3
3.6
3.2
2.8
2.4
A C
2.0
2.2 2.6 3.0 3.4 3.8 4.2 4.6 5.0 5.4
p / 105 Pa
Fig. 2.1
The gas undergoes a cycle of changes A to B to C to A.
During the change A to B, the volume of the gas increases from 2.3 × 10–3 m3 to 3.8 × 10–3 m3.
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/O/N/20

7
(i) Show that the magnitude of the work done during the change A to B is 390 J.
[1]
(ii) State and explain the total change, if any, in the internal energy of the gas during one
complete cycle.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) During the change A to B, 1370 J of thermal energy is transferred to the gas.
During the change B to C, no thermal energy enters or leaves the gas. The work done on the
gas during this change is 550 J.
Use these data and the information in (b) to complete Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
change q/J w/J ΔU / J
A to B
.......................... .......................... ..........................
B to C
.......................... .......................... ..........................
C to A
.......................... .......................... ..........................
[4]
[Total: 9]

8
3 A pendulum consists of a metal sphere P suspended from a fixed point by means of a thread, as
thread
metal sphere P
Fig. 3.1
The centre of gravity of sphere P is a distance L from the fixed point.
The sphere is pulled to one side and then released so that it oscillates. The sphere may be
assumed to oscillate with simple harmonic motion.
(a) State what is meant by simple harmonic motion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The variation of the velocity v of sphere P with the displacement x from its mean position is
shown in Fig. 3.2.
v / m s–1
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
–10 –8 –6 –4 –2 0 2 4 6 8 10
–0.1 x / cm
–0.2
–0.3
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/O/N/20

9
Use Fig. 3.2 to determine the frequency f of the oscillations of sphere P.
f = .................................................... Hz [3]
(c) The period T of the oscillations of sphere P is given by the expression
T = 2π cLm
g
Use your answer in (b) to determine the length L.
L = ..................................................... m [2]
(d) Another pendulum consists of a sphere Q suspended by a thread. Spheres P and Q are
identical. The thread attached to sphere Q is longer than the thread attached to sphere P.
Sphere Q is displaced and then released. The oscillations of sphere Q have the same
amplitude as the oscillations of sphere P.
On Fig. 3.2, sketch the variation of the velocity v with displacement x for sphere Q. [2]
[Total: 9]

10
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/O/N/20

11
4 (a) Explain the principles of the generation of ultrasound waves for use in medical diagnosis.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) The linear attenuation (absorption) coefficient for a parallel beam of ultrasound waves in air is
1.2 cm–1.
The parallel beam passes through a layer of air of thickness 3.5 cm.
Calculate the ratio, in dB,
intensity of beam after passing through the layer of air

.
intensity of beam entering the layer of air
ratio = .................................................... dB [4]
[Total: 8]

12
5 (a) Define electric potential at a point.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Two point charges A and B are separated by a distance of 12.0 cm in a vacuum, as illustrated
in Fig. 5.1.
charge A P charge B
12.0 cm
Fig. 5.1
The charge of A is +2.0 × 10–9 C.
A point P lies on the line joining charges A and B. Its distance from charge A is x.
The variation with distance x of the electric potential V at point P is shown in Fig. 5.2.
20
V / 102 V
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
x / cm
–10
–20
–30
–40
Fig. 5.2
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/O/N/20

13
Use Fig. 5.2 to determine:
(i) the charge of B
charge = ..................................................... C [3]
(ii) the change in electric potential when point P moves from the position where x = 9.0 cm to
the position where x = 3.0 cm.
change = ...................................................... V [1]
(c) An α-particle moves along the line joining point charges A and B in Fig. 5.1.
The α-particle moves from the position where x = 9.0 cm and just reaches the position where
x = 3.0 cm.
Use your answer in (b)(ii) to calculate the speed v of the α-particle at the position where
x = 9.0 cm.
v = ................................................ m s–1 [3]
[Total: 9]

14
6 (a) (i) Define the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State three functions of capacitors in electrical circuits.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
3. .......................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A student has available four capacitors, each of capacitance 24 μF.
The capacitors are connected as shown in Fig. 6.1.
24 μF
X
24 μF 24 μF
24 μF
Y
Fig. 6.1
Calculate the combined capacitance between the terminals X and Y.
capacitance = .................................................... μF [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/O/N/20

15
7 An ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is to be used in a comparator circuit.

Part of the comparator circuit is shown in Fig. 7.1.
+5.0 V
–
+
–5.0 V VOUT
Fig. 7.1
Three resistors, each of resistance 1000 Ω, and a negative temperature coefficient thermistor are
available to complete the circuit.
The circuit is to be designed so that, at low temperatures, the output VOUT is –5.0 V and at higher
temperatures, the output VOUT is to be +5.0 V.
(a) On Fig. 7.1, draw the input circuit to the inverting and non-inverting inputs of the op-amp. [4]
(b) State a suitable value for the thermistor resistance when the thermistor is at:
(i) low temperature where VOUT is –5.0 V
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) a higher temperature where VOUT is +5.0 V.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

16
8 A slice of a conducting material has its face QRLK normal to a uniform magnetic field of flux
density B, as illustrated in Fig. 8.1.
S R
M L magnetic flux
P density B
Q
J
K
direction of
movement of
electrons
Fig. 8.1
Electrons enter the slice travelling perpendicular to face PQKJ.
(a) For the free electrons moving in the slice:
(i) state the direction of the force on an electron due to movement of the electron in the
magnetic field
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) identify the faces, using the letters on Fig. 8.1, between which a potential difference is
developed.
face ................................. and face ................................. [1]
(b) Explain why the potential difference in (a)(ii) reaches a maximum value.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/O/N/20

17
(c) The number of free electrons per unit volume in the slice of material is 1.3 × 1029 m–3.
The thickness PQ of the slice is 0.10 mm.
The magnetic flux density B is 4.6 × 10–3 T.
Calculate the potential difference across the slice for a current of 6.3 × 10–4 A.
potential difference = ...................................................... V [2]
(d) The slice in (c) is a metal.
By reference to your answer in (c), suggest why Hall probes are usually made using
semiconductors rather than metals.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]

18
9 (a) Define magnetic flux.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A simple transformer consists of two coils of wire wound on a soft-iron core, as illustrated in
Fig. 9.1.
soft-iron core
primary coil
secondary coil
Fig. 9.1
There is a sinusoidal current in the primary coil.
Explain:
(i) how this current gives rise to an induced electromotive force (e.m.f.) in the secondary
coil
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) why the e.m.f. induced in the secondary coil is not constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/O/N/20

19
(c) Explain why the soft-iron core in (b) is laminated.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

20
10 (a) Outline briefly the principles of computed tomography (CT scanning).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/O/N/20

21
(b) One section of a model designed to illustrate CT scanning is divided into four voxels.
The pixel numbers K, L, M and N of the voxels are shown in Fig. 10.1.
D3
D2
D4
D1 K L
N M
Fig. 10.1
The section is viewed, in turn, from four different directions D1, D2, D3 and D4, as shown in
Fig. 10.1.
The detector readings for each direction are noted and these are summed to give the values
shown in Fig. 10.2.
42 45
51 30
Fig. 10.2
The background reading is 24.
Determine the pixel numbers K, L, M and N shown in Fig. 10.1.
K = ...............................................................
L = ...............................................................
M = ...............................................................
N = ...............................................................
[3]
[Total: 8]

22
11 A photon of wavelength 540 nm collides with an isolated stationary electron, as illustrated in

Fig. 11.1.
electron
incident photon
wavelength 540 nm
deflected photon
wavelength 544 nm
Fig. 11.1
The photon is deflected elastically by the electron.

The wavelength of the deflected photon is 544 nm.
(a) (i) State what is meant by a photon.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) On Fig. 11.1, draw an arrow to indicate the approximate direction of motion of the
deflected electron. [1]
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/O/N/20

23
(b) Calculate:
(i) the momentum of the deflected photon
momentum = ................................................... N s [2]
(ii) the energy transferred to the deflected electron.
energy = ...................................................... J [2]
(c) Another photon of wavelength 540 nm collides with an isolated stationary electron.
Explain why it is not possible for the deflected photon to have a wavelength less than 540 nm.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

24
12 Iodine-131 (131 –7 –1
53 I) is a radioactive isotope with a decay constant of 9.9 × 10 s .
(i) radioactive
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Some water becomes contaminated with iodine-131.

The activity of the iodine-131 in 1.0 kg of water is 560 Bq.
Determine the number of iodine-131 atoms in 1.0 kg of water.
number = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Regulations require that the activity of iodine-131 in 1.0 kg of water is to be less than 170 Bq.
Calculate the time, in days, for the activity of the contaminated water in (b) to be reduced to
170 Bq.
time = ................................................ days [3]

[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 9702/41/O/N/20

* 5 1 5 3 6 4 4 8 2 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (NF/SW) 183249/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/O/N/20

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
V

(x02–x2)
v = ± ω √
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ=
t 1
2

4
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The Earth may be considered to be a uniform sphere of radius 6.4 × 106 m with its mass of
6.0 × 1024 kg concentrated at its centre.
A satellite of mass 2.4 × 103 kg is launched from the Equator. It is placed in an equatorial orbit
at a height of 5.6 × 106 m above the Earth’s surface.
(i) Calculate the change ΔEP in gravitational potential energy of the satellite for its movement
from the surface of the Earth to its position in the equatorial orbit.
ΔEP = ....................................................... J [3]
(ii) Determine the speed of the satellite when in orbit.
speed = ................................................ m s–1 [3]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/O/N/20

5
(c) Before the satellite in (b) is launched, its speed at the Equator due to the Earth’s rotation is
470 m s–1.
Suggest why the energy required to launch the satellite depends on whether the satellite, in
its orbit, is travelling from west to east or from east to west.
��
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]

6
��
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The atoms of an ideal gas occupy a container of volume 2.30 × 10–3 m3 at pressure
2.60 × 105 Pa and temperature 180 K, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1.
2.30 × 10–3 m3 3.80 × 10–3 m3

2.60 × 105 Pa 2.60 × 105 Pa
180 K T
980 J
Fig. 2.1
The gas is heated at constant pressure so that its volume becomes 3.80 × 10–3 m3 at a
temperature T.
For the fixed mass of gas, calculate:
(i) the amount of substance, in mol
amount = ................................................... mol [2]
(ii) the temperature T, in K.
T = ...................................................... K [2]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/O/N/20

7
(c) During the change in (b), the thermal energy supplied to the gas is 980 J.
(i) Determine the work done on the gas during this change. Explain your working.
work done = ....................................................... J [3]
(ii) Determine the change ΔU in internal energy of the gas.
ΔU = ....................................................... J [1]
[Total: 10]

8
3 A simple pendulum consists of a metal sphere suspended from a fixed point by means of a thread,
as illustrated in Fig. 3.1.
thread
L sphere
mass 94.0 g
0.90 cm
12.7 cm
The sphere of mass 94.0 g is displaced to one side through a horizontal distance of 12.7 cm. The
centre of gravity of the sphere rises vertically by 0.90 cm.
The sphere is released so that it oscillates. The sphere may be assumed to oscillate with simple
harmonic motion.
(a) State what is meant by simple harmonic motion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i) State the kinetic energy of the sphere when the sphere returns to the displaced position
shown in Fig. 3.1.
kinetic energy = ....................................................... J [1]
(ii) Calculate the total energy ET of the oscillations.
ET = ....................................................... J [2]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/O/N/20

9
(iii) Use your answer in (ii) to show that the angular frequency ω of the oscillations of the
pendulum is 3.3 rad s–1.
[2]
(c) The period T of oscillation of the pendulum is given by the expression
L
T = 2π g
where g is the acceleration of free fall and L is the length of the pendulum.
Use data from (b) to determine L.
L = ...................................................... m [3]
[Total: 10]

10
4 (a) State two advantages of the transmission of data in digital, rather than analogue, form.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) An analogue signal is to be transmitted in digital form.
The transmission system may be represented in block form as in Fig. 4.1.
digital-to-
analogue-to-
analogue analogue analogue
digital converter
signal converter signal
ADC
DAC
Fig. 4.1
The variation with time t of part of the input analogue signal is shown in Fig. 4.2.
input 5
analogue
signal 4
/ mV
3
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
t / ms
Fig. 4.2
The analogue signal is sampled at time intervals of 0.10 ms. The first sample is taken at time
t = 0.
Some values of the sampled analogue signal and the corresponding digital signals are shown
in Table 4.1.
Each digitised number contains four bits.
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/O/N/20

11
Table 4.1
time t / ms 0 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50
analogue signal
0 5.7 6.2
/ mV ................. ................. .................
digital signal 0000 0101 0110

................. ................. .................
(i) In Table 4.1, underline the least significant bit (LSB) in the digital signal for the time of
0.20 ms. [1]
(ii) Complete Table 4.1. [3]
(c) A single bit from the output of the digital-to-analogue converter corresponds to an output
analogue signal of 1.0 mV.
Assume that the conversion and transmission do not introduce a time delay.
On the axes of Fig. 4.3, show the variation with time t of the output from the digital-to-analogue
converter.
output 5
analogue
signal 4
/ mV
3
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
t / ms
Fig. 4.3
[3]
[Total: 9]

12
5 (a) (i) State what is meant by a field of force.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State one similarity and one difference between the electric field due to a point charge
and the gravitational field due to a point mass.
similarity: ...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
difference: ..........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) An isolated solid metal sphere of radius 0.15 m is situated in a vacuum, as illustrated in
Fig. 5.1.
0.15 m
P
Fig. 5.1
The electric field strength at the surface of the sphere is 84 V m–1.
Determine:
(i) the charge Q on the sphere
Q = ...................................................... C [2]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/O/N/20
13
(ii) the electric field strength at point P, a distance x = 0.45 m from the centre of the sphere.
electric field strength = ................................................ V m–1 [2]
(c) Use information from (b) to show, on the axes of Fig. 5.2, the variation of the electric field
strength E with distance x from the centre of the sphere for values of x from x = 0 to x = 0.45 m.
100
80
E / V m–1
60
40
20
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
x/m
Fig. 5.2
[3]
[Total: 11]

14
6 (a) (i) Define the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State three functions of capacitors in electrical circuits.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
3. .......................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A student has available three capacitors, each of capacitance 12 μF.
Draw diagrams, one in each case, to show how the student connects the capacitors to give a
combined capacitance between the terminals of:
(i) 18 μF
[1]
(ii) 8 μF.
[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/O/N/20

15
7 Electrons in a beam are travelling at high speed in a vacuum. The electrons are incident on a
metal target, causing X-ray radiation to be emitted.
The variation with wavelength λ of the intensity I of the emitted X-ray radiation is shown in Fig. 7.1.
0
0 λ
Fig. 7.1
Explain why:
(a) there is a continuous distribution of wavelengths
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) at certain wavelengths, there are narrow peaks of increased intensity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]

16
8 (a) An ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is said to have infinite bandwidth and infinite slew
rate.
(i) infinite bandwidth
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An amplifier circuit incorporating an op-amp is shown in Fig. 8.1.
+5.0 V
–5.0 V
VIN 800 Ω VOUT
Fig. 8.1
The resistance of resistor R is to be fixed so that, for an input potential difference VIN of
0.40 V, the amplifier is on the point of saturation.
Determine:
(i) the gain of the amplifier circuit
gain = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/O/N/20

17
(ii) the resistance of resistor R.
resistance = ...................................................... Ω [2]
[Total: 6]
9 (a) A small coil is placed close to one end of a solenoid connected to a power supply. The plane
of the small coil is normal to the axis of the solenoid, as illustrated in Fig. 9.1.
solenoid small coil
power supply
Fig. 9.1

18
The power supply causes the current I in the solenoid to vary with time t as shown in Fig. 9.2.
current I
0
t1 t2
time t
Fig. 9.2
(i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) On the axes of Fig. 9.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the
electromotive force (e.m.f.) induced in the small coil.
e.m.f.
0
t1 t2 time t
Fig. 9.3
[4]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/O/N/20

19
(b) The small coil in (a) is now replaced by a Hall probe.
The Hall probe is positioned so that the reading for the probe is a maximum.
The current I in the solenoid varies again as shown in Fig. 9.2.
On the axes of Fig. 9.4, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the reading VH of
the probe.
VH
0
t1 t2 time t
Fig. 9.4
[2]
[Total: 8]

20
10 (a) A long straight vertical wire A carries a current in an upward direction.

The wire passes through the centre of a horizontal card, as illustrated in Fig. 10.1.
card
current-carrying
wire A
Fig. 10.1
The card is viewed from above. The card is shown from above in Fig. 10.2.
card
wire A carrying
current out
of plane of paper
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.2, draw four lines to represent the magnetic field produced by the current-carrying
wire. [3]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/O/N/20

21
(b) Two wires A and B are now placed through a card. The two wires are parallel and carrying
currents in the same direction, as illustrated in Fig. 10.3.
wire B
wire A
card
Fig. 10.3
(i) Explain why a magnetic force is exerted on each wire.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the directions of the forces.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The currents in the two wires are not equal.
Explain whether the magnetic forces on the two wires are equal in magnitude.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

22
11 (a) Electromagnetic radiation is incident on a metal surface.
It is observed that there is a minimum frequency of electromagnetic radiation below which

emission of electrons does not occur.
This observation provides evidence for a particulate nature of electromagnetic radiation.
State two other observations associated with photoelectric emission that provide evidence
for a particulate nature of electromagnetic radiation.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The maximum kinetic energy EMAX of electrons emitted from a metal surface is determined
for different wavelengths λ of the electromagnetic radiation incident on the surface.
1
The variation with of EMAX is shown in Fig. 11.1.
λ
0.6
EMAX / eV
0.4
0.2
0
1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
1
/ 106 m–1
λ
Fig. 11.1
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/O/N/20

23
(i) Use Fig. 11.1 to determine the threshold frequency f0.
f0 = .................................................... Hz [2]
(ii) Use the gradient of the line on Fig. 11.1 to determine a value for the Planck constant h.
h = ..................................................... J s [4]
(c) The electromagnetic radiation is now incident on a metal with a larger work function energy
than the metal in (b).
1
On Fig. 11.1, sketch the variation with of EMAX. [2]
λ
[Total: 10]

24
12 (a) (i) Define nuclear binding energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain what is meant by a nuclear fission reaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A student suggests that one possible nuclear reaction is
56Fe + 10n 20F + 37Cl.

26 9 17
The binding energy per nucleon of a nucleus varies with the nucleon number.
Use this variation to explain why the reaction would not result in an overall release of energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 9702/42/O/N/20

* 9 2 7 8 8 4 1 6 6 0 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
2 hours
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CE/SW) 220802
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/O/N/21

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
V

(x02–x2)
v = ± ω √
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ=
t 1
2

4
1 (a) With reference to velocity and acceleration, describe uniform circular motion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Two cars are moving around a horizontal circular track. One car follows path X and the other
follows path Y, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
start and finish line

track
path X
27 m 318 m
path Y
The radius of path X is 318 m. Path Y is parallel to, and 27 m outside, path X. Both cars have
mass 790 kg. The maximum lateral (sideways) friction force F that the cars can experience
without sliding is the same for both cars.
(i) The maximum speed at which the car on path X can move around the track without
sliding is 94 m s–1.
Calculate F.
F = ..................................................... N [2]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/O/N/21

5
(ii) Both cars move around the track. Each car has the maximum speed at which it can
move without sliding.
Complete Table 1.1, by placing one tick in each row, to indicate how the quantities
indicated for the car on path Y compare with the car on path X.
Table 1.1
Y less than X Y same as X Y greater than X
centripetal
acceleration
maximum speed
time taken for one lap

of the track
[3]
[Total: 7]

6
2 (a) Define gravitational potential.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The Earth E and the Moon M can both be considered as isolated point masses at their
centres. The mass of the Earth is 5.98 × 1024 kg and the mass of the Moon is 7.35 × 1022 kg.
The Earth and the Moon are separated by a distance of 3.84 × 108 m, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
3.84 × 108 m
Earth E Moon M
mass 5.98 × 1024 kg mass 7.35 × 1022 kg
P is a point, on the line joining the centres of E and M, where the resultant gravitational field
strength is zero. Point P is at a distance x from the centre of the Earth.
(i) Explain how it is possible for the gravitational field strength to be zero despite the
presence of two large masses nearby.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Show that x is approximately 3.5 × 108 m.
[2]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/O/N/21

7
(iii) Calculate the gravitational potential φ at point P.
φ = ............................................... J kg–1 [3]
[Total: 9]

8
3 (a) Define specific heat capacity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A sealed container of fixed volume V contains N molecules, each of mass m, of an ideal gas
at pressure p.
(i) State an expression, in terms of V, N, p and the Boltzmann constant k, for the
thermodynamic temperature T of the gas.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Show that the mean translational kinetic energy EK of a molecule of the gas is given by
3
EK = kT.
2
[2]
(iii) Explain why the internal energy of the gas is equal to the total kinetic energy of the
molecules.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The gas in (b) is supplied with thermal energy Q.
(i) Explain, with reference to the first law of thermodynamics, why the increase in internal
energy of the gas is Q.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/O/N/21

9
(ii) Use the expression in (b)(ii) and the information in (c)(i) to show that the specific heat
capacity c of the gas is given by
3k
c= .
2m
[2]
(d) The container in (b) is now replaced with one that does not have a fixed volume. Instead, the
gas is able to expand, so that the pressure of the gas remains constant as thermal energy is
supplied.
Suggest, with a reason, how the specific heat capacity of the gas would now compare with
the value in (c)(ii).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 13]

10
4 A trolley on a track is attached by springs to fixed blocks X and Y, as shown in Fig. 4.1. The track
contains many small holes through which air is blown vertically upwards. This results in the trolley
resting on a cushion of air rather than being in direct contact with the track.
springs
L
trolley
X Y
fixed block holes track fixed block
Fig. 4.1
The trolley is pulled to one side of its equilibrium position and then released so that it oscillates
initially with simple harmonic motion. After a short time, the air blower is switched off. The variation
with time t of the distance L of the trolley from block X is shown in Fig. 4.2.
30
L / cm
25
20
15
10
0 4 8 12 16 20 24
t/s
Fig. 4.2
(a) Use Fig. 4.2 to determine:
(i) the initial amplitude of the oscillations
amplitude = ................................................... cm [1]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/O/N/21

11
(ii) the angular frequency ω of the oscillations
ω = .............................................. rad s–1 [2]
(iii) the maximum speed v0, in cm s–1, of the oscillating trolley.
v0 = .............................................. cm s–1 [2]
(b) Apart from the quantities in (a), describe what may be deduced from Fig. 4.2 about the motion
of the trolley between time t = 0 and time t = 24 s. No calculations are required.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) On Fig. 4.3, sketch the variation with L of the velocity v of the trolley for its first complete
oscillation.
10
v / cm s–1
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 L / cm 30
–5
–10
Fig. 4.3
[3]
[Total: 11]
12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/O/N/21

13
5 An analogue signal is to be transmitted to a receiver. Before transmission, the signal passes

through an analogue-to-digital converter (ADC). After transmission it passes through a
digital-to-analogue converter (DAC) before finally reaching the receiver, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
transmission line
input receiver
ADC DAC
signal
Fig. 5.1
(a) State two advantages of converting the signal into digital form for transmission.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The variation with time of the potential difference (p.d.) of the input signal is shown in Fig. 5.2.
p.d. / mV
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
time / ms
Fig. 5.2
The ADC has a sampling frequency of 250 Hz and uses 4-bit sampling, with the least
significant bit corresponding to 1 mV. The signal is first sampled at time 0, when the sampled
bits are 0001.
(i) State the sampled bits at time 4 ms and time 8 ms.
4 ms: ............................................. 8 ms: ............................................. [1]

14
(ii) Part of the signal received by the receiver, after the sampled signal has passed through
the DAC, is shown in Fig. 5.3.
p.d. / mV
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
time / ms
Fig. 5.3
On Fig. 5.3, complete the line to show the received signal for time 0 to time 12 ms. [2]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/O/N/21

15
(c) The ADC in (b) is replaced with one that has a sampling frequency of 500 Hz and uses 3-bit
sampling, with the least significant bit corresponding to 2 mV.
On Fig. 5.4, sketch the signal that is now received, after passing through the DAC, from
time 0 to time 12 ms.
p.d. / mV
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
time / ms
Fig. 5.4
[3]
[Total: 8]

16
6 (a) A capacitor consists of two parallel metal plates, separated by air, at a variable distance x
apart, as shown in Fig. 6.1. The capacitance C is inversely proportional to x.
x
metal plates
Fig. 6.1
The capacitor is charged by a supply so that there is a potential difference (p.d.) V between
the plates.
State expressions, in terms of C and V, for the charge Q on one of the plates and for the
energy E stored in the capacitor.
Q = ............................................. E = ............................................. [1]
(b) The charged capacitor in (a) is now disconnected from the supply. The plates of the capacitor
are initially separated by distance L. They are then moved closer together by a distance D, as
shown in Fig. 6.2.
D new position
original position
Fig. 6.2
State expressions, in terms of C, V, L and D, for:
(i) the new capacitance CN
CN = ......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/O/N/21

17
(ii) the new charge QN on one of the plates
QN = ......................................................... [1]
(iii) the new p.d. VN between the plates.
VN = ......................................................... [1]
(c) Explain whether reducing the separation of the plates in (b) results in an increase or decrease
in the energy stored in the capacitor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]

18
7 (a) State two properties of an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp).
1. . ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. . ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a circuit that includes an ideal op-amp and two identical resistors R.
+5 V
V R
L
–
Y
X R
–5 V
Fig. 7.1
State the names of components X and Y.
X: ............................................ Y: ............................................ [1]
(c) (i) Explain why the op-amp in Fig. 7.1 has only two possible output states.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the name of the type of op-amp circuit in which the op-amp behaves as in (c)(i).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/O/N/21

19
(iii) Describe the environmental condition under which the lamp L in Fig. 7.1 will light.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Suggest the purpose of the variable resistor V in the circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

20
8 (a) Define the tesla.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A stiff metal wire is used to form a rectangular frame measuring 8.0 cm × 6.0 cm. The frame is
open at the top, and is suspended from a sensitive newton meter, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
newton meter
insulating thread
5.0 A
8.0 cm frame
P Q
6.0 cm
Fig. 8.1
The open ends of the frame are connected to a power supply so that there is a current of
5.0 A in the frame in the direction indicated in Fig. 8.1.
The frame is slowly lowered into a uniform magnetic field of flux density B so that all of side
PQ is in the field. The magnetic field lines are horizontal and at an angle of 50° to PQ, as
shown in Fig. 8.2.
P Q view from above

50°
Fig. 8.2
When side PQ of the frame first enters the magnetic field, the reading on the newton meter
changes by 1.0 mN.
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/O/N/21

21
(i) Determine the magnetic flux density B, in mT.
B = ................................................... mT [2]
(ii) State, with a reason, whether the change in the reading on the newton meter is an
increase or a decrease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The frame is lowered further so that the vertical sides start to enter the magnetic field.
Suggest what effect this will have on the frame.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

22
9 (a) State, by reference to the power dissipated in a resistor, what is meant by the
root-mean-square (r.m.s.) value of an alternating voltage.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A coil is rotating freely, on frictionless bearings, at constant speed in a uniform magnetic
field. This rotation causes an induced alternating electromotive force (e.m.f.) across the open
terminals of the coil. The induced e.m.f. has r.m.s. value 12 V and frequency 50 Hz.
The speed of rotation of the coil is now doubled.
(i) State and explain, with reference to the principles of electromagnetic induction, the effect
of the increased speed of rotation on the r.m.s. value of the induced e.m.f.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) On Fig. 9.1, sketch the variation with time t of the induced e.m.f. E across the terminals
of the coil at the increased speed of rotation. Your line should extend from time t = 0 to
time t = 20 ms. Assume that E = 0 when t = 0.
40
E/V
20
0
0 5 10 15 20
t / ms
–20
–40
Fig. 9.1
[3]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/O/N/21

23
(c) State and explain the effect on the motion of the coil in (b) of connecting a load resistor
across its terminals.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

24
10 (a) State an experimental phenomenon that provides evidence for:
(i) the particulate nature of electromagnetic radiation
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the wave nature of matter.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A particle of matter moves with momentum p.
(i) State the equation that gives the effective wavelength λ of the particle. State the name of
any other symbols used.
[2]
(ii) State the name given to the wavelength of the moving particle.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Electrons are accelerated from rest through a potential difference (p.d.) of 4.8 kV.
(i) Show that the final speed of the electrons is 4.1 × 107 m s–1.
[2]
(ii) Calculate the effective wavelength of a beam of electrons moving at the speed in (c)(i).
wavelength = ..................................................... m [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/O/N/21

25
11 (a) State, for an X-ray image, what is meant by:
(i) sharpness
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) contrast.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A parallel X-ray beam passes through a thickness of 2.3 cm of soft body tissue. The intensity
of the emerging beam is 12% of the intensity of the incident beam.
Calculate the linear attenuation (absorption) coefficient μ of the soft body tissue. Give a unit
with your answer.
μ = .......................................... unit ..................... [3]
(c) In medical diagnosis, X-rays may be used to produce a single X-ray image or may be used in
computed tomography (CT scanning).
Suggest an advantage and a disadvantage of CT scanning compared with single X-ray

imaging for diagnosis.
advantage: ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage: ...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]

26
12 (a) Define radioactive decay constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A sample of radioactive iodine-131 (131

53 I) of mass 5.87 × 10
–10 kg has an activity of
9
2.92 × 10 Bq.
Determine the decay constant of iodine-131.
decay constant = ................................................... s–1 [3]
(c) Suggest two reasons why a detector placed near to the sample in (b) would record a count
rate much less than 2.92 × 109 counts per second.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/O/N/21

27
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/O/N/21

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9702/41/O/N/21

* 4 0 7 9 9 9 0 5 3 2 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CJ/SG) 199361/2
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/O/N/21

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
V

(x02–x2)
v = ± ω √
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
1
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ=
t 1
2

4
1 (a) State what is meant by centripetal acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) An unpowered toy car moves freely along a smooth track that is initially horizontal. The track
contains a vertical circular loop around which the car travels, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
62 cm
loop
toy car
mass 230 g
track
Fig. 1.1
The mass of the car is 230 g and the diameter of the loop is 62 cm. Assume that the resistive
forces acting on the car are negligible.
(i) State what happens to the magnitude of the centripetal acceleration of the car as it
moves around the loop from X to Y.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain, if the car remains in contact with the track, why the centripetal acceleration of
the car at point Y must be greater than 9.8 m s–2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/O/N/21

5
(c) The initial speed at which the car in (b) moves along the track is 3.8 m s–1.
Determine whether the car is in contact with the track at point Y. Show your working.
[3]
(d) Suggest, with a reason but without calculation, whether your conclusion in (c) would be
different for a car of mass 460 g moving with the same initial speed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]

6
2 (a) State the relationship between gravitational potential and gravitational field strength.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A moon of mass M and radius R orbits a planet of mass 3M and radius 2R. At a particular
time, the distance between their centres is D, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
planet moon
mass 3M mass M
radius 2R radius R
Fig. 2.1
Point P is a point along the line between the centres of the planet and the moon, at a variable
distance x from the centre of the planet.
The variation with x of the gravitational potential φ at point P, for points between the planet
and the moon, is shown in Fig. 2.2.
0 x
0 2R D–R
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/O/N/21

7
(i) Explain why φ is negative throughout the entire range x = 2R to x = D – R.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) One of the features of Fig. 2.2 is that φ is negative throughout.
Describe two other features of Fig. 2.2.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) On Fig. 2.3, sketch the variation with x of the gravitational field strength g at point P
between x = 2R and x = D – R.
0 x
0 2R D–R
Fig. 2.3
[3]
[Total: 10]

8
3 (a) One of the assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases is that all collisions involving molecules
of the gas are elastic.
(i) State what is meant by an elastic collision.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State two other assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A molecule of an ideal gas has mass m and is contained in a cubic box of side length L. The
molecule is moving with velocity u towards the face of the box that is shaded in Fig. 3.1.
molecule L
Fig. 3.1
The molecule collides elastically with the shaded face and the face opposite to it alternately.
Deduce expressions, in terms of m, u and L, for:
(i) the magnitude of the change in momentum of the molecule on colliding with a face
change in momentum = ......................................................... [1]
(ii) the time between consecutive collisions of the molecule with the shaded face
time = ......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/O/N/21

9
(iii) the average force exerted by the molecule on the shaded face
force = ......................................................... [1]
(iv) the pressure on the shaded face if the force in (iii) is exerted over the whole area of the
face.
pressure = ......................................................... [1]
(c) When the model described in (b) is extended to three dimensions, and to a gas containing N
molecules, each of mass m, travelling with mean-square speed 〈c2〉, it can be shown that
1
pV = 3 Nm〈c2〉
where p is the pressure exerted by the gas and V is the volume of the gas.
Use this expression, together with the equation of state of an ideal gas, to show that the
average translational kinetic energy EK of a molecule of an ideal gas is given by
3
EK = 2 kT
where T is the thermodynamic temperature of the gas and k is the Boltzmann constant.
[2]
(d) The mass of a hydrogen molecule is 3.34 × 10–27 kg.
Use the expression for EK in (c) to determine the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of a
molecule of hydrogen gas at 25 °C.
r.m.s. speed = ............................................... m s–1 [2]
[Total: 11]
10
4 A trolley on a smooth surface is attached by springs to fixed blocks as shown in Fig. 4.1.
springs
trolley
fixed block smooth surface fixed block
Fig. 4.1
The trolley oscillates horizontally about its equilibrium position with an amplitude of 12 cm. Fig. 4.2
shows the variation of the acceleration a of the trolley with displacement x from its equilibrium
position. Friction between the trolley and the surface can be assumed to be negligible.
0.8
a / m s–2
0.4
0
–12 –8 –4 0 4 8 12
x / cm
– 0.4
–0.8
Fig. 4.2
(a) Describe the features of the line in Fig. 4.2 that demonstrate that the motion of the trolley is
simple harmonic.
...................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/O/N/21

11
(b) Use Fig. 4.2 to determine the period T of the oscillations of the trolley.
T = ...................................................... s [3]
(c) (i) On the line of the graph of Fig. 4.2, label with the letter P one point where the kinetic
energy of the trolley is zero. [1]
(ii) On the line of the graph of Fig. 4.2, label with the letter Q an approximate position of one
point where the kinetic energy of the trolley is equal to the potential energy stored in the
springs. [1]
[Total: 7]

12
5 (a) (i) When audio signals are transmitted over long distances, modulation of radio waves is
used.
Suggest a reason why modulation is used.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State a technical advantage and a technical disadvantage of using frequency modulation
rather than amplitude modulation.
advantage: ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
disadvantage: ....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) An audio signal of amplitude 2.0 μV and frequency 4.2 kHz is to be transmitted using a carrier
wave of amplitude 10.0 mV and frequency 100 kHz.
Either amplitude modulation or frequency modulation may be used.
The amplitude modulation is at a rate of 1 mV μV–1.

The frequency modulation is at a rate of 5 kHz μV–1.
Complete Table 5.1 to show the maximum and minimum values of the amplitude and of the
frequency of the modulated wave for each type of modulation.
Table 5.1
amplitude / mV frequency / kHz

minimum maximum minimum maximum
amplitude modulation
frequency modulation
[4]
(c) For the amplitude modulated wave in (b), determine the bandwidth.
bandwidth = .................................................. kHz [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/O/N/21

13
6 (a) Define electric potential.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) An isolated conducting sphere in a vacuum has radius r and is initially uncharged. It is then
charged by friction so that it carries a final charge Q. This charge can be considered to be
acting at the centre of the sphere.
By considering the electric potential at its surface, show that the capacitance C of the sphere
is given by
C = 4πε0r
where ε0 is the permittivity of free space.
[2]
(c) The dome of an electrostatic generator is a spherical conductor of radius 13 cm. It is initially
charged so that the electric potential at the surface is 4.5 kV.
A smaller isolated sphere of radius 5.2 cm, initially uncharged, is brought near to the dome.
Sparking causes a current between the two spheres until they reach the same potential.
Assume that any charge on a sphere may be considered to act as a point charge at its centre.
Calculate the charge that is transferred between the two spheres.
charge = ..................................................... C [3]
[Total: 7]

14
7 (a) An operational amplifier (op-amp) has two input terminals and one output terminal.
State what is meant by the gain of an op-amp.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State two effects of negative feedback on the gain of an amplifier circuit that uses an op-amp.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Fig. 7.1 shows an op-amp circuit that uses negative feedback.
1.2 kΩ
+8.0 V
480 Ω
VIN –
VOUT
+
–8.0 V
0V 0V
Fig. 7.1
(i) State the name of the type of circuit shown in Fig. 7.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On Fig. 7.1, label with the letter X a point in the circuit that is considered to be a virtual
earth. [1]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/O/N/21

15
(iii) Calculate the gain of the circuit in Fig. 7.1.
gain = ......................................................... [2]
(iv) Determine the value of VIN when VOUT is +6.5 V.
VIN = .......................................................V [1]
(v) Determine the value of VOUT when VIN is –5.4 V.
VOUT = .......................................................V [1]
[Total: 10]

16
8 Two long straight parallel wires P and Q carry currents into the plane of the paper, as shown in
Fig. 8.1.
P Q
current I current 2I
Fig. 8.1
The current in P is I and the current in Q is 2I.
(a) (i) On Fig. 8.1, draw an arrow to show the direction of the magnetic field at wire Q due to
the current in wire P. Label this arrow B. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, draw another arrow to show the direction of the force acting on wire Q due to
the current in wire P. Label this arrow F. [1]
(b) (i) State, with a reason, how the magnitude of the force acting on wire P compares with the
magnitude of the force acting on wire Q.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State how the direction of the force on wire P compares with the direction of the force on
wire Q.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/O/N/21

17
9 (a) State what is meant by:
(i) the photoelectric effect
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) work function energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A polished calcium plate in a vacuum is investigated by illuminating the surface with light.
It is found that no photoelectric current is produced when the frequency of the light is less
than 6.93 × 1014 Hz.
(i) State the name of the frequency below which no photoelectric current is produced.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain how the photon model of electromagnetic radiation accounts for this phenomenon.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Calculate the work function energy, in eV, of calcium.
work function energy = .................................................... eV [2]
[Total: 9]

18
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a simple laminated iron-cored transformer consisting of a primary coil of 25 000
turns and a secondary coil of 625 turns.
laminated iron core
25 000 625
VIN 640 Ω VOUT
turns turns
Fig. 10.1
The output potential difference (p.d.) VOUT is applied to a load resistor of resistance 640 Ω.
(a) (i) State the function of the iron core.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the iron core is laminated.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The input p.d. VIN is a sinusoidal alternating voltage of peak value 12 kV and period 40 ms.
(i) Calculate the maximum value of VOUT.
maximum VOUT = ...................................................... V [1]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/O/N/21

19
(ii) Calculate the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) current in the load resistor.
r.m.s. current = ...................................................... A [1]
(iii) On Fig. 10.2, sketch the variation with time t of the power P dissipated in the load resistor
for time t = 0 to t = 40 ms. Assume that P = 0 when t = 0.
200
P/W
100
0
0 10 20 30 40
t / ms
–100
–200
Fig. 10.2
[3]
(c) Explain, with reference to Fig.10.2, why the mean power in the load resistor is 70 W.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/O/N/21

21
11 (a) A piezoelectric transducer containing a quartz crystal is used to obtain diagnostic information
about internal structures.
Describe the function of the quartz crystal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe, qualitatively, how the specific acoustic impedances of two materials affect the
intensity reflection coefficient at a boundary between the materials.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

22
12 (a) Radioactive decay is both random and spontaneous.
(i) random
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) spontaneous.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A sample of radioactive material contains atoms of an unstable nuclide X. The activity of the
sample due to the atoms of X is A. The variation with time t of ln A is shown in Fig. 12.1.
36.6
In (A / Bq)
36.2
35.8
35.4
35.0
0 5 10 15 20 25
t / min
Fig. 12.1
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/O/N/21

23
(i) Use Fig. 12.1 to determine the half-life, in minutes, of nuclide X.
half-life = .................................................. min [3]
(ii) At time t = 0, the mass of the atoms of X in the sample is 5.66 × 10–7 kg.
Determine the nucleon number of X.
nucleon number = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/O/N/21

24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9702/42/O/N/21

Physics A Level

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physics A Level

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physics A Level

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Answer all questions.

Electronic calculators may be used.

This document consists of 23 printed pages and 1 blank page.

speed of light in free space c = 3.00 × 108 m s−1

permeability of free space μ0 = 4π × 10−7 H m−1

permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10−12 F m−1

the Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10−34 J s

unified atomic mass unit 1 u = 1.66 × 10−27 kg

rest mass of electron me = 9.11 × 10−31 kg

rest mass of proton mp = 1.67 × 10−27 kg

molar gas constant R = 8.31 J K−1 mol−1

the Avogadro constant NA = 6.02 × 1023 mol−1

the Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10−23 J K−1

gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10−11 N m2 kg−2

acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s−2

© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

work done on/by a gas W = p ΔV

hydrostatic pressure p = ρgh

velocity of particle in s.h.m. v = v0 cos ωt

capacitors in series 1/C = 1/C1 + 1/C2 + . . .

electric current I = Anvq

resistors in parallel 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 + . . .

alternating current/voltage x = x0 sin ω t

radioactive decay x = x0 exp(−λt )

© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17 [Turn over

Answer all the questions in the spaces provided.

1 (a) Define gravitational potential at a point.

© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

Use the expression in (b)(i) to determine the distance from A to B.

distance = .......................................................m [3]

© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17 [Turn over

2 (a) The first law of thermodynamics can be represented by the expression

State what is meant by the symbols in the expression.

© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

change in internal energy = ........................................................ J [1]

© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17 [Turn over

beam metal block

The acceleration a of the block is given by the expression

© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

maximum kinetic energy = ........................................................ J [3]

Determine the amplitude of oscillation.

amplitude = .......................................................m [2]

© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17 [Turn over

© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

(ii) A minimum signal-to-noise ratio of 24 dB is needed at the receiver in order for it to be

© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17 [Turn over

The charges are separated in a vacuum by a distance of 10.0 cm.

(i) Calculate charge +Q.

© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

Describe the acceleration of the charge as it moves from A to B.

© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17 [Turn over

© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17

(i) The strain gauge is initially unstrained with resistance 300.0 Ω.

© UCLES 2017 9702/42/F/M/17 [Turn over

8 (a) State what is meant by a magnetic field.

uniform magnetic field